2014 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M - Dealer E Process

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-6081479) - 2014 - crc - 6/4/13

2014 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-32Universal Remote System . . . . 5-35

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-19Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-27Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-33Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-37Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-57

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27


2014 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M

Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-14

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, andEQUINOX are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 22852843 A First Printing ©2013 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Danger, Warnings, andCautions

{ Danger

Text marked{ Danger providesinformation on risk of fatal injury.Disregarding this information mayendanger life.

{ Warning

Text marked{ Warning providesinformation on risk of accident orinjury. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to injury.

{ Caution

Text marked{ Caution providesinformation that may indicate ahazard that could result in injuryor death. It could also result inpossible damage to the vehicle.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

J : OnStar®

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

% : Steering Wheel Controls

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Head RestraintAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-19Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-20Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Universal Remote System . . . 1-21

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-21Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-22E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

1. Air Vents on page 8-6.

2. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals onpage 6-3.

Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.

Fog Lamps on page 6-3 (IfEquipped).

3. Instrument Cluster on page 5-8.

4. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5-4.

5. Power Door Locks on page 2-7.

6. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4-1 (If Equipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)Display (If Equipped). SeeForward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-37.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)Indicator (If Equipped). SeeLane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-43.

7. Touchscreen (If Equipped).

8. Safety Locks on page 2-8.

9. Infotainment on page 7-1.

10. Hood Release (Out of View).See Hood on page 10-4.

11. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-13.

12. Cruise Control on page 9-35.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)Button (If Equipped). SeeForward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-37.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Button (If Equipped).See Lane Departure Warning(LDW) on page 9-43.

13. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6-4.

14. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2.

15. Horn on page 5-3.

16. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2.

17. Ignition Positions onpage 9-19.

18. Climate Control Systems onpage 8-1 (If Equipped).

Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-3 (IfEquipped).

19. Shift Lever. See Shifting IntoPark on page 9-24.

20. Fuel Economy Mode onpage 9-29 (If Equipped).

21. Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-33.

22. Power Outlets on page 5-6.

23. CD Player on page 7-13.

24. Driver Information CenterButtons (If Equipped). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-22.

25. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-3.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter may work up to60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.

The RKE transmitter can have oneof the two symbols for the remotetrunk release.

With Remote Start Shown

Press this button to extend the key.The key can be used for the ignitionand all locks.

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors.

For vehicles with the manualliftgate, press K twice withinfive seconds to unlock the liftgate.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

V orY : If equipped with thepower liftgate, press and hold untilthe liftgate begins to move.


In Brief 1-5

7 : Press and release to initiatevehicle locator. Press and hold for atleast three seconds to sound thepanic alarm. Press 7 again tocancel the panic alarm.

/ : Press Q and release and thenimmediately press and hold/ for atleast four seconds to start theengine from outside the vehicle.

See Keys on page 2-1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRemote Keyless Entrytransmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe signal lamps flash.

The parking lamps will turn onand remain on as long as theengine is running. The vehicle'sdoors will be locked.

3. The key must be inserted andturned to ON/RUN beforedriving.

The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a time extensionis done or the key is inserted andturned to ON/RUN.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press/ until the parking lampsturn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Insert the key and turn it to ON/RUN and then back toLOCK/OFF.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-5.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the vehicle fromthe outside, press Q or K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Base Radio Shown, UplevelSimilar

There is a power door lock switchon the instrument panel.


1-6 In Brief

There are power door lock switcheson the front door panels.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks on page 2-7.

To manually unlock a door frominside the vehicle, pull once on thedoor handle to unlock it, and asecond time to open it.


{ : Press for safety locks. SeeSafety Locks on page 2-8.

Liftgate

Manual Liftgate Operation

Unlock the vehicle before openingthe liftgate.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad under the liftgate handle andlift up.

Do not press the touch pad whileclosing the liftgate. This may causethe liftgate to be unlatched.

Power Liftgate Operation

On vehicles with a power liftgate,the vehicle must be in P (Park) touse the power feature. The taillampsflash when the power liftgatemoves.

Choose the power liftgate mode byturning the dial on the switch toeither the 3/4 or MAX position.Press8 to open or close theliftgate.


In Brief 1-7

See Liftgate on page 2-9.

Windows

Press the front of the switch to lowerthe window. Pull the switch up toraise it.

See Power Windows on page 2-18.

Seat Adjustment

Four-Way Power Seat

1. Seat Position Handle

2. Height Adjustment Control

To adjust the seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward using the handle underthe front of the seat cushion (1).See Seat Adjustment onpage 3-3.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the control (2) upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Eight-Way Power Seat

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.


1-8 In Brief

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Lumbar Adjustment

Eight-Way Power Seat Shown,Four-Way Similar

If available, press and hold the frontor rear of the switch to increase ordecrease lumbar support. Releasethe switch when the seatbackreaches the desired level of lumbarsupport.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-5.

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if available:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.


In Brief 1-9

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-5.

Memory Features

If available, the “1,” “2,” and MEM(Memory) buttons on the outboardside of the driver seat are used tomanually save and recall the driverseat and outside mirror positions.

These manually stored positions arereferred to as Button Memorypositions.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outside mirrorpositions to the current driverRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isturned off. These automaticallystored positions are referred to asRKE Memory positions.

See Memory Seats on page 3-6 andVehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.

Heated Seats

Uplevel Climate Control SystemShown, Base Similar

If available, the buttons are near theclimate controls. To operate, theignition must be in ON/RUN.

Press z or J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Indicator lights on the button showthe temperature setting.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3-8.


1-10 In Brief

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3-2and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3-11.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3-12.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-13.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3-39.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing system willturn off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-25.


In Brief 1-11

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theoverhead console when the vehicleis started. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-12.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Return the selector switch to themiddle position.

See Power Mirrors on page 2-15.

Interior

Adjustment

Adjust the rearview mirror to clearlyview the area behind the vehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid the glare ofthe headlamps from behind. SeeManual Rearview Mirror onpage 2-17.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

Vehicles with an automatic dimminginside rearview mirror automaticallyreduce the glare of the headlampsfrom behind. The dimming feature

comes on when the vehicle isstarted. See Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror on page 2-17.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.


1-12 In Brief

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingReading Lamps

These lamps are located on theoverhead console. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

For manual operation, press thebutton next to each lamp to turn iton or off.

Dome Lamps

There are front and rear domelamps.

The dome lamp controls are locatedin the overhead console. To changethe settings, press the following:

* : Turns the lamp off, even whena door is open.

1 : The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

+ : Turns the dome lamps on.

The dome lamps can also be turnedon and off by pressing the buttonsnext to the lamps.

For more information on interiorlighting, See Instrument PanelIllumination Control on page 6-4.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal lever.

O : Turn to operate the exteriorlamps.

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic light control off oron again.

AUTO: Turns the exterior lamps onand off automatically depending onthe exterior light.

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,together with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6-1. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6-2. Fog Lamps on page 6-3


In Brief 1-13

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column. With the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, move the windshield wiperlever to select the wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: Move the lever up to INT forintermittent wipes, then turn the3 INT band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

nL FRONT: Pull the windshieldwiper lever toward you to spraywindshield washer fluid and activatethe wipers.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper controls are on theend of the windshield wiper lever.

ON: Press the upper portion of thebutton for continuous rear windowwipes.

OFF: The rear wiper turns off whenthe button is returned to the middleposition.

INT: Press the lower portion of thebutton to set a delay betweenwipes.

m = REAR: Push the windshieldwiper lever forward to spray washerfluid on the rear window.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3 and Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5-4.


1-14 In Brief

Climate ControlsThe vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlledwith these systems.

Climate Control System

1. Fan Control

2. Air Delivery Mode Controls

3. Temperature Control

4. Outside Air

5. Front Defrost

6. Rear Window Defogger

7. Recirculation

8. Air Conditioning


In Brief 1-15

Automatic Climate Control System

1. Fan Control

2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)


4. Front Defrost

5. Recirculation


7. Power

8. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats


10. Air Conditioning

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8-1 (If Equipped) or AutomaticClimate Control System on page 8-3(If Equipped).

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-16.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the park brake pedal.


1-16 In Brief

See Parking Brake on page 9-31.

Transmission

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS or manual mode allows for theselection of the range of gearpositions. Use this mode whendriving down hill or towing a trailerto limit the top gear and vehiclespeed.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus button onthe shift lever, to increase ordecrease the gear rangeavailable.

See Manual Mode on page 9-29 formore information.

Fuel Economy Mode

Vehicles with a 2.4L engine have aFuel Economy Mode. Whenengaged, Fuel Economy Mode canimprove the vehicle's fuel economy.

Press the eco (economy) buttonnext to the shift lever to turn thisfeature on or off. The eco light in theinstrument cluster will come onwhen engaged, and a DriverInformation Center (DIC) messagedisplays. See Fuel Economy Modeon page 9-29.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

VOL/ O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

RADIO/BAND: Press to choosebetween FM and AM.

MENU/SEL: Turn to select radiostations.

Press to show available informationabout the current station or track.

g SEEK: Press to seek theprevious station or track.

l SEEK: Press to seek the nextstation or track.

Buttons 1–6: Press to save andselect favorite stations

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7-4.


In Brief 1-17

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1-6 until the stationcan be heard again.

For more information, see “Storing aStation as a Favorite” in AM-FMRadio on page 7-7.

Setting the Clock

For detailed instructions on settingeither clock, see Clock on page 5-5.

To set the time on the Radio withCD and Touchscreen:

1. Press H to enter the menuoptions. Turn the MENU/SELknob to scroll through theavailable setup features.

2. Press + or − to decrease orincrease the Hours and Minutesdisplayed on the clock.

12/24 HR Format: Press the 12 HRscreen button for standard time;press the 24 HR screen button formilitary time.

Day + or Day −: Press the Day +and Day − display buttons toincrease or decrease the day.

Display: Press Display to turn thedisplay of the time on the screen onor off.

Satellite RadioVehicles with a SiriusXM® satelliteradio tuner and a valid SiriusXMsatellite radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.

SiriusXM Satellite RadioService

SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide

variety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A fee is required to receive theSiriusXM service.

Refer to:. www.siriusxm.com or call

1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio on page 7-9.

Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport in the center console. Externaldevices such as iPods®, laptopcomputers, MP3 players, CDchangers, and USB drives may beconnected, depending on the audiosystem.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-17.


1-18 In Brief

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone to make and receivehands-free calls using the vehicleaudio system and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled mobilephone must be paired with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system before itcan be used in the vehicle. Not allphones will support all functions.

See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7-21 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7-23 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7-26.

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio steering wheel controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g : Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth or OnStarsystems, if equipped.

> /i : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or end a current call.

_ SRC ^ : Press to select an audiosource.

Toggle up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station,CD, or MP3 track.

+ VOL −: Press + to increase thevolume; press − to decrease thevolume.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5-2.

Cruise Control


In Brief 1-19

ON/OFF5 CRUISE: Press to turnthe cruise control system on and off.

* CANCEL: Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+: Move the thumbwheel upbriefly to make the vehicle resumeto a previously set speed or holdupward to accelerate. If cruisecontrol is already active, use toincrease vehicle speed.

SET/−: Move the thumbwheel downbriefly to set the speed and activatecruise control. If cruise control isalready active, use to decreasespeed.

See Cruise Control on page 9-35.

Infotainment SystemThe base radio information isincluded in this manual, if equipped.See the infotainment manual forinformation on the uplevel radios,audio players, phone, navigationsystem, and voice or speechrecognition. There is also

information on settings anddownloadable applications (ifequipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the center ofthe instrument cluster. It shows thestatus of many vehicle systems.

The DIC buttons are below theclimate control system.

MENU: Press this button to get tothe Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu.

Q or R : Use these buttons toscroll through the items in eachmenu. A small marker will movealong the page as you scroll throughthe items. This shows where eachpage is in the menu.

SET/CLR: Use this button to set orclear the menu item when it isdisplayed.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-22.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemFor vehicles with FCA, this systemis intended to help avoid or reducethe harm caused by front-endcrashes. FCA provides a flashingvisual alert and beeps whenapproaching a vehicle directlyahead too quickly. FCA alsoprovides a visual alert if followinganother vehicle much too closely.The forward-looking FCA camerasensor is on the windshield aheadof the rearview mirror. FCA detectsvehicles within a distance of


1-20 In Brief

approximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 40 km/h(25 mph).

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-37.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW is intended to helpavoid unintentional lane departuresat speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater. LDW uses a camera sensorto detect the lane markings. TheLDW indicator, @, appears green ifa lane marking is detected. If thevehicle departs the lane, theindicator will change to amber andflash. In addition, beeps will sound.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-43.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, RVC displays a view ofthe area behind the vehicle, on theinfotainment system display, whenthe vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9-41.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf equipped, this system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph). Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) uses audiblebeeps to provide distance andsystem information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9-39.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to connect electricalequipment, such as a cell phone orMP3 player.

There are four accessory poweroutlets in the following locations:below the CD slot, inside the centerconsole storage, on the rear of thecenter console storage, and in therear cargo compartment.

To use the outlets, remove the coverand close when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5-6.


In Brief 1-21

Universal Remote System

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console. The system canreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist with programmingthe Universal Remote system.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5-35.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe traction control system limitswheel spin. The system is on whenthe vehicle is started.

The StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem is on when the vehicle isstarted.. To turn off traction control, press

and release g on the console.i illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5-29.

. Press and release g again toturn traction control back on.

. To turn off both Traction Controland StabiliTrak, press andhold g until g and i illuminateand the appropriate DICmessage displays. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5-29.

. Press g again to turn on bothsystems.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-33.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle'stires. If the warning light comes on,


1-22 In Brief

stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-14.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-46.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENU button todisplay the VehicleInformation menu.

3. Press either the up or downarrows to view REMAININGOIL LIFE.

4. Press the SET/CLR button until100% is displayed.

5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

Or:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-11.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuelon page 9-48. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9-46.


In Brief 1-23

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14-1.


1-24 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-13Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-14

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-17Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and alllocks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button and the key blade toretract the key.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

If it becomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter may work up to60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-2.

The RKE transmitter can have oneof the two symbols for the remotetrunk release. With Remote Start Shown

The following may be available:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking. See “Remote LockFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-32. If apassenger door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock. If the driverdoor is open when Q is pressed, alldoors lock except the driver door.These settings can be modified.

See “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-13.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See“Remote Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-32. The turn signalindicators may flash to indicateunlocking has occurred. For moreinformation see “Remote UnlockLight Feedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-32.Pressing K may also disarm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-13.

For vehicles with the manualliftgate, press K twice withinfive seconds to unlock the liftgate.

V orY (Remote LiftgateRelease): If equipped with thepower liftgate, press and hold untilthe liftgate begins to move.



7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to initiate vehicle locator. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps three times. Press and hold7 for at least three seconds tosound the panic alarm. The hornsounds and the turn signals flashuntil 7 is pressed again or the keyis placed in the ignition and turnedto ON/RUN.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):If equipped, first press and releaseQ then immediately press and hold/ for at least four seconds to startthe engine from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2-5.

The buttons on the keys aredisabled when there is a key in theignition.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a

replacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed. See your dealer tohave new transmitters programmed.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter

To program a new key:

1. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand turn to the key to the ON/RUN position.

2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

3. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it to theON/RUN position withinfive seconds.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.

4. Repeat Steps 1–3 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If a key is lost or damaged, see yourdealer to have a new key made.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter

Program a new key to the vehiclewhen a recognized key is notavailable. Canadian regulationsrequire that owners see their dealer.

If there are no currently recognizedkeys available, follow this procedureto program the first key.

This procedure will takeapproximately 30 minutes tocomplete for the first key. Thevehicle must be off and all of thekeys you wish to program must bewith you.

1. Insert the new vehicle key intothe ignition.

2. Turn to ON/RUN. The securitylight will come on.

3. Wait 10 minutes until thesecurity light turns off.



4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two moretimes. After the third time, turn toON/RUN; the key is learned andall previously known keys will nolonger work with the vehicle.

Remaining keys can be learned byfollowing the procedure in“Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter.”

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. SeeKey and Lock Messages onpage 5-28.

{ Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

The battery is not rechargeable. Toreplace the battery:

1. Press the button on thetransmitter to extend the key.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying with a finger.

3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the key blade.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThe vehicle may have this featurethat allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start. The rear defog maycome on during remote start basedon cold ambient conditions. Therear defog indicator light does notcome on during remote start.

If the vehicle has heated seats, theymay come on during a remote start.See Heated Front Seats onpage 3-8.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view. Checklocal regulations for anyrequirements.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-2.



Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash. Theturn signal lamps flashingconfirms the request to remotestart the vehicle has beenreceived.

The parking lamps will turn onand remain on as long as theengine is running. The vehicle'sdoors will be locked.

3. The key must be inserted andturned to ON/RUN beforedriving.

The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a timeextension is done or the key isinserted and turned to ON/RUN.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1 and 2 while the engine isstill running. The remote start canbe extended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the engine has beenrunning for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition switch mustbe turned to ON/RUN and then backto LOCK/OFF using the key, beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To shut off the engine:. Press / until the parking lamps

turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Insert the key and turn it to ON/RUN and then back toLOCK/OFF.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition.. The hood or doors are not

closed.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. There is an emission control

system malfunction.. The engine coolant temperature

is too high.. The oil pressure is low.. Two remote vehicle starts have

already been used.. The vehicle is not in P (Park).



Remote Start Ready

If the vehicle does not have theremote vehicle start feature, it mayhave the remote start ready feature.This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer's remotevehicle start feature. See yourdealer to add the manufacturer'sremote vehicle start feature to thevehicle.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

doors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen slowing or stopping thevehicle. Lock the doors tohelp prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock a door from theoutside of the vehicle, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. Pull the handle oncefrom the inside to unlock the door,and a second time to open it.

Power Door Locks


There is a power door lock switchon the instrument panel.



There are power door lock switcheson the front door panels.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

When locking the doors with apower door lock switch and a dooror the liftgate is open, the doors willlock five seconds after the last dooris closed. Three chimes sound tosignal the delayed locking feature isin use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice or Q on the RKE transmittertwice will override the delayedlocking feature and immediately lockall doors.

This feature can be programmed.See “Delayed Door Lock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.

Safety Locks


The rear door safety locks switch ison the instrument panel.

Rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Press { to activate the safety locks.When activated, the indicator light inthe switch changes to amber.

Press { again to deactivate thesafety locks.

If a rear door handle is pulled whenthe safety lock is deactivated, thatdoor will remain locked and theindicator light may flash. Releasethe handle, then press the safetylock twice to deactivate the safetylocks.



Doors

Liftgate

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

See Engine Exhaust onpage 9-26.

{ Caution

To avoid damage to the liftgate orliftgate glass, make sure the areaabove and behind the liftgate isclear before opening it.

Manual Liftgate

To unlock the liftgate, press thepower door lock switch or press Kon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter twice. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad under the liftgate handle andlift up.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. Thismay cause the liftgate to beunlatched.

Always close the liftgate beforedriving.

Power Liftgate

On vehicles with a power liftgate,the vehicle must be in P (Park) tooperate. The taillamps flash whenthe power liftgate moves.



{ Warning

You, or others, could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

The power liftgate has three modesof operation. Mode selection iscontrolled by the interior modeswitch.

Choose the power liftgate mode byturning the dial on the switch untilthe indicator lines up with thedesired position. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park).

The three modes are:

MAX: The liftgate power opens tothe full open height.

3/4: The liftgate power opens to areduced open height that can be setby the vehicle operator. Use thissetting to prevent the liftgate fromopening into overhead obstructionssuch as a garage door or roofmounted cargo during poweroperation. The liftgate can still befully opened manually.

OFF: The liftgate only operatesmanually in this position.

Manual operation of a liftgate thatalso has power operation requiresmore effort than a standard manualliftgate.

The liftgate can be opened manuallyby pressing the touch pad under theliftgate handle, with the doorsunlocked and lifting up.

In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode,the liftgate can be power openedand closed by:

. Pressing and holdingV orYon the RKE transmitter until theliftgate starts moving. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

. Pressing the power liftgatebutton in the center of the modeswitch on the overhead console,with the driver door unlocked.



Press and release8 on theliftgate adjacent to the latch to closethe liftgate.

Pressing any button, or the touchpad switch, while the liftgate ismoving stops it. Pressing the buttonor RKE transmitter again reversesthe direction. The touch pad switchwill stop the liftgate from moving.There is a minimum distance thatthe power liftgate must already beopen for the system to hold it open.If movement is stopped below thatminimum, the liftgate closes.

Do not force the liftgate open orclosed during a power cycle.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures or low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.

If the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power function isin progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park) and accelerated before thepower liftgate latch is closed, theliftgate may reverse to the openposition. Cargo could fall out of thevehicle. Always make sure thepower liftgate is closed and latchedbefore driving away.

If the liftgate is power opened andthe liftgate support struts have lostpressure, the turn signals flash anda chime will sound. The liftgatestays open temporarily, and thenslowly closes. See a dealer forservice before using the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,a warning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or openposition. After removing theobstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again. If theliftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivateand a message will display in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Object Detection SystemMessages on page 5-28. Afterremoving the obstructions, theliftgate will resume normal poweroperation.

Pinch sensors are located on theside edges of the liftgate. If anobject is caught between the liftgateand the vehicle and presses againstthis sensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgatewill remain open until it is activatedagain or closed manually.



Power Liftgate 3/4 Mode

To program the liftgate openingheight:

1. Turn the liftgate switch to eitherthe MAX, or the 3/4 modeposition and power open theliftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany liftgate switch. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifrequired.

3. Press and hold the button on theliftgate adjacent to the latch untilthe turn signals flash and a beepsounds to indicate that the newsetting is recorded.

When power opened with the 3/4mode selected, the liftgate stops atthe new set position.

If there is no audible and visualfeedback when setting theintermediate stop position, theliftgate height is being set below the3/4 open height minimum(approximately 1.5 m or 5 ft). Theliftgate cannot be set below thatminimum and the new setting willnot be recorded.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, turn the mode switch tothe OFF position.

With the power liftgate disabled andall of the doors unlocked, the liftgatecan be manually opened andclosed. Manual operation of aliftgate that also has poweroperation requires more effort thana standard manual liftgate.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle on the outside ofthe liftgate, and lift the gate open. Toclose the liftgate, use the pull cup tolower the liftgate and close. With thepower liftgate disabled, the liftgateelectric latch will still power latchonce contact is made with thestriker. Always close the liftgatebefore driving.

IfV orY on the RKE transmitteris pressed while power operation isdisabled, the turn signals flash andthe liftgate will not move.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will notopen. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system:

Off: Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid: Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the hood, or the liftgateis open.

Slow Flash: Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:. Use the RKE transmitter.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin to slowlyflash indicating the alarm systemis operating. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm the alarmsystem.

The vehicle alarm system will notarm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is notstarted, or the door is not unlockedby pressing K on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-secondpre-alarm, the alarm will beactivated.

If a door, the hood, or the liftgate isopened without first disarming thesystem, the turn signals will flashand the horn will sound for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Start the vehicle.



To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle after all

occupants have left the vehicleand all doors are closed.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter.

Unlocking the driver door with thekey will not disarm the system orturn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps threetimes, an alarm occurred previouslywhile the alarm system was armed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.See Security Messages onpage 5-30.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only an authorized keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The security light in the instrumentcluster comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key. If the enginedoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may bedamaged. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Return the selector switch to themiddle position.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

The heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdefogger is on and help to clear fogor frost from the surface of themirrors.

1 (Rear Window Defogger): Thisbutton is on the climate controlpanel.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 8-3 for more information.

Blind Spot MirrorsThe blind spot mirror is a smallconvex mirror built into the upperand outer corner of both outsidemirrors. It can show objects thatmay be in the vehicle's blind zone.



Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View

1. When the approaching vehicle isa long distance away, the imagein the main mirror is small andnear the inboard edge of themirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitions fromthe main mirror to the blind spotmirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blindzone, the image only appears inthe blind spot mirror.

Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirrorhas an unobstructed view.

2. When checking for traffic orbefore changing a lane, look atthe main driver/passenger sidemirror to observe traffic in theadjacent lane, behind yourvehicle. Check the blind spotmirror for a vehicle in the blindzone. Then, glance over yourshoulder to double check beforemoving slowly into theadjacent lane.



Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle is equipped withmemory mirrors, there is an optionto have the mirrors tilt down, whenin R (Reverse), to more easily seethe ground near the vehicle.

When the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse), both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downward.They will return to their previousposition when the vehicle is shiftedout of R (Reverse), the ignition isturned to OFF, or the vehicle is leftin R (Reverse) for an extendedperiod of time.

This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, there arethree buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Manual Rearview MirrorPush the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it rearward fornighttime use to avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorIf equipped, automatic dimmingreduces the glare of headlampsfrom behind. The dimming featurecomes on when the vehicle isstarted.



Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys on page 2-1.

The power windows work when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-23.

Press the front of the switch to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.



Express Down Windows

Windows that have theexpress-down feature allow thewindows to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press thewindow switch fully and release it toactivate the express-down feature.The express mode can be canceledat any time by briefly pressing,or pulling the switch.

Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position.

Pressv to activate the rearwindow lockout switch. Theindicator light comes on whenactivated.

Pressv again to deactivate thelockout switch.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. If equipped, detach the sunvisor from the center mount to pivotto the side window or to extendalong the rod.

Roof

SunroofIf equipped, the sunroof switchesare on the headliner above therearview mirror. The ignition must bein ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,or in Retained Accessory Power(RAP) to operate the sunroof. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9-19 andRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-23.



. Press and hold the front or rearof the driver side switch to openor close the sunroof. Thesunshade automatically openswith the sunroof, but must beclosed manually.

. Press and hold the rear of thepassenger side switch to ventthe sunroof. Press and hold thefront of the switch to close.

Express-open/Express-close

Press and release the front or rearof the driver side switch toexpress-open or express-close thesunroof.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof when it is closing, theanti-pinch feature detects the objectand stops the sunroof from closingat the point of the obstruction. Thesunroof then returns to the full-openposition.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-17Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-17Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-20When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-30

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-30Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-36Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-37Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Securing Child Restraints(Front PassengerPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle's front seats have headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.



To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seat has headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

Rear outboard head restraints arenot designed to be removed.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front of theseat cushion.

2. Move the seat forward orrearward to adjust the seatposition.

3. Release the handle to stop theseat from moving.

4. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.



Power Seat AdjustmentFour-Way Power Seat

1. Seat Position Handle

2. Height Adjustment Control


rearward using the handle underthe front of the seat cushion (1).See Seat Adjustment onpage 3-3.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the control (2) upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3-5.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3-5.

Eight-Way Power Seats


rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3-5.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3-5.



Lumbar Adjustment

Power Lumbar

Eight-Way Power Seat Shown,Four-Way Similar

If available, press and hold the frontor rear of the switch to increase ordecrease lumbar support. Releasethe switch when the seatbackreaches the desired level of lumbarsupport.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.



To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if available:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

Memory Seats

If available, the “1,” “2,” and MEM(Memory) buttons on the outboardside of the driver seat are used tomanually save and recall the driverseat and outside mirror positions.These manually stored positions arereferred to as Button Memorypositions.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outside mirrorpositions to the current driverRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition is



turned off. These automaticallystored positions are referred to asRKE Memory positions. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, and both outside mirrorsto the desired driving positions.

2. Press and hold MEM (Memory)and “1” at the same time until abeep sounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using “2.”

Recalling Button MemoryPositions

To recall the Button Memorypositions, press and hold “1” or “2.”The driver seat and outside mirrorsmove to the positions stored tothose buttons when pressed.

Releasing “1” or “2” before thestored positions are reached stopsthe recall.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the memory item that isnot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby pressing the appropriate memorybutton. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Recalling RKE Memory Positions(Memory Remote Recall)

The Memory Remote Recall featurecan recall the driver seat andoutside mirrors to previously storedRKE Memory positions whenentering the vehicle.

Every time the ignition is turned off,the positions of the driver seat andoutside mirrors are automaticallystored to the RKE transmitter thatwas used to start the vehicle. These

positions are called RKE Memorypositions and may be different thanthe previously mentioned ButtonMemory positions saved to the“1” or “2” buttons. To recall RKEMemory positions, unlock the driverdoor with the RKE transmitter andopen the driver door. If the driverdoor is already open, pressing theRKE transmitter K button will alsoactivate the RKE Memory recall.The driver seat and outside mirrorswill move to the previously savedRKE Memory positions.

This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-32.

To stop recall movement, press anyof the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the memory item that is



not recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby opening the driver door andpressing the RKE K button. If thememory position is still not recalling,see your dealer for service.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the driver moreroom to exit the vehicle.

To activate, turn the ignition off andopen the driver door. If the driverdoor is already open, turning theignition off will activate the recall.

This feature can be turned on or offusing the vehicle personalizationmenu. See Vehicle Personalizationon page 5-32.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory or power seatcontrols.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold thepower seat control rearward for

two seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Heated Front Seats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Uplevel Climate Control SystemShown, Base Similar

If available, the buttons are near theclimate controls. To operate, theignition must be in ON/RUN.

Press z or J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting, and onelight indicates the lowest.



The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats can be programmed to turn onautomatically during a remotevehicle start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the heated seatbutton to use the heated seats afterthe vehicle is started.

The heated seat button lights willnot turn on during a remote start.

The temperature of an unoccupiedseat may be reduced.

To program the heated seat featureto enabled, see VehiclePersonalization on page 5-32.

Rear SeatsSplit Folding Seatbacks

Either side of the rear seatback canbe folded down for more cargospace.

Folding the Seatbacks

{ Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback down:

1. Unbuckle the rear safety beltsand place the front seatbacks inthe upright position. SeeReclining Seatbacks onpage 3-5.

2. Lift the lever on the top of theseatback.

3. Fold the seatback forward.

Keep the seatback in the upright,locked position when not in use.



Raising the Seatbacks

{ Warning

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

To raise the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on top of theseatback. Raise the seatbackand release the lever.

2. Push the seatback rearward untilit locks in the upright position.

3. Make sure the rear safety beltsare not twisted or caughtbetween the seat cushion andthe seatback.

Reclining the Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift and hold the lever on top ofthe seatback.

2. Tilt the seatback rearward, thenrelease the lever when theseatback is in the desiredposition.

Seat Adjustment

To slide the entire seat forward orrearward:

1. Lift and hold the release barunder the front of the seatcushion to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition.

3. Release the bar.

4. Try to move the seat back andforth to ensure the seat is lockedinto place.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5-11.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the



safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3-31 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3-33.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.



. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3-17.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3-12.

Move the height adjuster up to thedesired position by pushing up onthe height adjuster.



After the height adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pressing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition. Press the release button tolower the height adjuster.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners are activated in acrash, the pretensioners andpossibly other parts of the safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3-18.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

There is one guide for each outsidepassenger position in the rear seat.Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side of theseatback.



2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. The belt should not be twistedand it should lie flat. The elasticcord must be under the belt andthe guide on top.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.



To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide back into its storagepocket located on the side of theseatback.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealer



to have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-11.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3-18.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.

See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-11.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along the trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3-22.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 3-31 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3-33.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-11.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.



The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the instrumentpanel on the passenger side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.



{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System onpage 3-19. Airbags are designed toinflate if the impact exceeds thespecific airbag system's deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors that help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.

It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasadvanced technology frontalairbags. Advanced technologyfrontal airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact.Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not designed to inflate in frontalimpacts, near frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.



A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck, if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over on its side, or in asevere frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from the

inflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3-20.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in the

first and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3-22.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot for



several minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-20.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after an

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps, turn on thehazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps, and turn offthe hazard warning flashers byusing the controls for thosefeatures.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be there



to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13-13 and Event DataRecorders on page 13-14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. The

passenger airbag status indicatorwill be visible on the overheadconsole when the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, or the symbol foron or off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-12.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagshould be allowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children age12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.



{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litto remind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-12.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.



For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson’s seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly —whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-11 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3-44 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Position) onpage 3-47.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s size. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.



If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, seat massagers,laptops, or other electronicdevices.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk of

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

serious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system



operates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-30 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on thepassenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is on

the seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-11 forimportant safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-11.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

proper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, overhead console,front sensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properly

turning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-25.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10-53 foradditional important information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13-3.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-11.



{ Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-20. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-11.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-13. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-13.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.



{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.



Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child's



weight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-39.

Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.



Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, no

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

system is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-25 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.



Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in thevehicle. The LATCH system isdesigned to make installation of achild restraint easier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturer

recommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).



Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

The rear outboard seating positionshave exposed metal anchors in thecrease between the seatback andthe seat cushion.



To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is near the top tetheranchors.

Top Tether Anchors

The top tether anchors for each rearseating position are on the back ofthe rear seatback. The rearcompartment storage panel/cover

might need to be adjusted to accessthe anchors. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3-37 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ Warning

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one child

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

{ Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-37.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead, use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments to

secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.



2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Route, attach and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

. If the position being useddoes not have a headrestraint and a single tetheris being used, route thetether over the seatback.

. If the position being useddoes not have a headrestraint and a dual tether isbeing used, route the tetherover the seatback.

. If the position being usedhas a fixed head restraintand a dual tether is beingused, route the tetheraround the head restraint.

. If the position being usedhas a fixed head restraintand a single tether is beingused, route the tether overthe head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be no



more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-39 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3-39 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3-37.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.



2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-39 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Armrest Retaining Strap

{ Warning

A rear center armrest that is notproperly stowed and securedcould fall forward during a suddenstop or collision. The armrestcould contact an infant secured ina rear‐facing child restraint in thecenter seat position. Fasten theretaining strap onto the stowedarmrest before installing a rear‐facing child restraint in the rearcenter seat position.

When new, the vehicle's glove boxmaterials included an armrestretaining strap. Use it to secure the

center armrest before installing arear-facing child restraint in thesecond row center seat position.

Stow the rear seat center armrest.Attach the retaining strap to thearmrest loop (1) and to the centertop tether anchor on theseatback (2). Make sure theretaining strap's clips are firmlyattached.

Install the rear-facing child restraintusing the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions and theinstructions described previously.



Remove the armrest retaining strapbefore installing a forward facingchild restraint in the center seatposition, as it may interfere with theattachment of the top tether to thetop tether anchor on the seatback.

Securing Child Restraints(Front PassengerPosition)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-37.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-25 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5-12 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front passengerairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thefront passenger airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front seat, always move thefront passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-25 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-39 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see Lower



Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-39 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag status

indicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-12.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbag is off, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3-25.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Instrument Panel Storage

There may be a storagecompartment on the instrumentpanel. Pull the handle to open.

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up onthe lever.

CupholdersTwo cupholders are in the centerconsole. Cupholders may be locatedin the second row seat armrest. Toaccess, pull the armrest down.


4-2 Storage

Center Console Storage

There is storage in the centerconsole; lift the lever on the front toopen. If equipped there is a USBport and auxiliary jack input inside.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, useit to cover items in the rear of thevehicle.

To remove the cover from thevehicle, pull both ends toward eachother. To reinstall, place each end ofthe cover in the holes behind therear seat.

Cargo Tie-Downs

The vehicle may be equipped withfour cargo tie-downs located in therear compartment.

Convenience NetThis vehicle may have aconvenience net located in the rearof the vehicle. Attach it to the cargotie‐downs for storing small loads.

Do not use the net to store heavyloads.


Storage 4-3

Roof Rack System

{ Warning

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

If equipped, the vehicle has a roofrack. For roof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GM certifiedcrossrails can be purchased as anaccessory. See your dealer foradditional information.

{ Caution

Loading cargo on the roof rackthat weighs more than 100 kg(220 lb) or hangs over the rear orsides of the vehicle may damagethe vehicle. Load cargo so that itrests evenly between thecrossrails, making sure to fastencargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle's centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers;otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,

occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle. For more information onvehicle capacity and loading, seeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-14.

The roof rack crossrails can belocked in four positions along theroof rack side rails. These are theonly positions that the crossrailswill lock.


4-4 Storage

Lift the lever to release and movethe crossrail.

Position the crossrail on both sidesof the vehicle at the same time.

Push the lever down to completelyengage into the side rail holes. If thelever is not tight, then the crossrailis not engaged in a side rail hole.

Slide the crossrails back and forthuntil the lock pins engage in theholes and a click is heard as thepins align and the crossrail locks.

Try sliding the crossrails forwardand backward to ensure that theyare correctly secured and that thelevers stay tight to the crossrails.

Do not stand on the plastic lowerbody panels when loading cargo onthe roof rack.

When the roof rack is not in use,lock one crossrail at the furthestforward position and lock the othercrossrail at the furthest rearwardposition to reduce wind noise.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-11

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-18Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-18

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-19Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-20Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-21Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-21Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-26Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-26Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-26Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-26Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-27Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-28Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-28Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-28Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-30Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-30Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-31Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-32

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-35Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


Some audio steering wheel controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g (Push to Talk): Press tointeract with the available Bluetoothor OnStar systems, if equipped.

> /i (Mute/End Call): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar or



Bluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Thumbwheel Control):Press to select an audio source.

Toggle up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station,CD, or MP3 track.

+ VOL − (Volume): Press + toincrease the volume; press − todecrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column. With the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, move the windshield wiperlever to select the wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn the3 INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

nL FRONT (WindshieldWasher): Pull the windshield wiperlever toward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.The wipers will continue until thelever is released or the maximumwash time is reached. When thewindshield wiper lever is released,additional wipes may occurdepending on how long thewindshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-20 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.



Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged blades shouldbe replaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10-25.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are on LO, HI,or INT, they will immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to off before the driver dooris opened or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are performingwipes due to windshield washing,the wipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

Rear Window Wiper/WasherThe rear wiper controls are on theend of the windshield wiper lever.

ON: Press the upper portion of thebutton for continuous rear windowwipes.

OFF: The rear wiper turns off whenthe button is returned to the middleposition.

INT (Intermittent Rear Wipes):Press the lower portion of the buttonto set a delay between wipes.

m = REAR (Rear Washer): Pushthe windshield wiper lever forwardto spray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released.

Rear Wiper Arm AssemblyProtection

When using an automatic car wash,move the rear wiper control to OFF.This disables the rear wiper.

If the transmission is in N (Neutral)and the vehicle speed is very slow,the rear wiper will automatically stopat the base of the rear window.

The wiper operations return tonormal when the transmission is nolonger in N (Neutral) or the vehiclespeed has increased.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-20.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other information



from the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.

Avoid covering the GPS antenna,located on the roof, for long periodsof time with objects that mayinterfere with the antenna's ability toreceive a satellite signal. Thecompass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine whenthe GPS signal is restored andprovide a heading again.

ClockThe infotainment system controls,located on the instrument panel, areused to access the time and datesettings through the menu system.

See Operation on page 7-4 forinformation about how to use themenu system.

Setting the Clock with DateDisplay

To set the Time and Date:

1. Turn the infotainment system on.

2. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date Settings.

3. Select Set Time or Set Date.

4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob toadjust the highlighted value.

5. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the next value.

6. To save the time or date andreturn to the Time and DateSettings menu, press the MENU/SEL knob after adjusting thetime or date.

To set the 12/24 hour format:



3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

To set the month, day, and yearformat:



3. Highlight Month and DayFormat.

4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect DD/MM/YYYY (day/month/year), MM/DD/YYYY(month/day/year), or YYYY/MM/DD (year/month/day).

Setting the Clock Without DateDisplay

To set the Time and Date:


2. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings, or pressthe H button.



3. Select Set Time.

4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob toadjust the highlighted value.

5. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the next value.

6. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe MENU/SEL knob afteradjusting the time.

To set the 12/24 hour format:


2. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings, or pressthe H button.

3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Setting the Clock (Radio withCD and Touchscreen)

To set the time:

1. Press the CONFIG button toenter the menu options. Turn theTUNE/MENU knob to scrollthrough the available setupfeatures. Press the TUNE/MENUknob or press the Time screenbutton to display other optionswithin that feature.

2. Press + or − to decrease orincrease the Hours and Minutesdisplayed on the clock.

12/24 HR Format: Press the 12 HRscreen button for standard time;press the 24 HR screen button formilitary time.

Day + or Day −: Press the Day +or Day − display buttons to increaseor decrease the day.

Display: Press Display to turn thedisplay of the time on the screen onor off.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to connect electricalequipment, such as a cell phone orMP3 player.

There are four accessory poweroutlets in the following locations:below the CD slot, inside the centerconsole storage, on the rear of thecenter console storage, and in therear cargo compartment.

To use the outlets, remove the coverand close when not in use.

{ Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Power is alwayssupplied to the rear cargo outlet.Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.



Certain accessory plugs may not becompatible with the accessorypower outlets and could overloadvehicle and adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-57.

{ Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe vehicle's speed can be selectedto display on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and the speedometerin either kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). Telltales onthe speedometer indicate whetherkilometers or miles were chosen.The DIC will show the vehicle'sspeed after the limit on thespeedometer has been reached.

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper‐resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows about how much fuelthe vehicle has left in the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

The gauge will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel andthe low fuel light comes on, but thevehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.



Here are some situations that canoccur with the fuel gauge. None ofthese indicate a problem with thefuel gauge.. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge measures thetemperature of the vehicle's engine.

If the indicator needle moves to thehot side of the gauge toward thecolored line, the engine is too hot.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions, pulloff the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.



Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There is a passenger safety beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-25.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind passengers to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.This cycle continues several times ifthe passenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3-19.



The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5-30.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-25 forimportant safety information. Theoverhead console has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several seconds

as a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isallowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.



{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-11 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.

The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) alsodisplays a message.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5-25.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping to

maintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9-19.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that the OBDII system has detected a problemand diagnosis and service might berequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.



{ Caution

If the vehicle is continually drivenwith this light on, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system of the vehicle orthe replacement of the originaltires with other than those of thesame Tire Performance Criteria(TPC) can affect the vehicle'semission controls and can causethis light to come on.Modifications to these systems

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

could lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

. If towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-48. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.



A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9-46.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on when

the ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.



Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

Metric English

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fully

released, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspectedimmediately.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-68.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light comes on and stayson while driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.Start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light stays on afterdriving at a speed above 20 km/h(13 mph), see your dealer forservice. A chime may also soundwhen the light comes on steady.



If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-16.

See Brake System Messages onpage 5-26 for all brake‐related DICmessages.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light

For vehicles with the lane departurewarning system, this light is locatedon the center of the instrumentpanel. This light comes on brieflywhile starting the vehicle. If it does

not, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer. If the system is workingnormally, the light then turns off.

This light comes on green when thesystem is on and ready to operate.When the system determines thatthe vehicle is leaving its lanewithout using the turn signal, thislight will change to amber and flash.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-43.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) Warning LightThese lights are on the center of theinstrument panel.

The vehicle ahead light comes onwhen a vehicle is detected aheadand a possible collision can occur.

The forward collision alert comes onwhen following a vehicle much tooclosely. The light flashes when avehicle is being rapidly approached.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-37.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.



The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.


StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.




Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5-30. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-44.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-47.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, but ifthe oil level is within the operating

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

range and the oil pressure is stilllow, have the vehicle serviced.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.



Fuel Economy Light

For vehicles with the Fuel EconomyMode light, it comes on when theeco (economy) button near the shiftlever is pressed. For vehicles with aDriver Information Center (DIC) anECO MODE ON message displays.See Fuel System Messages onpage 5-28. Press the button againto turn off the light and exit the fuelsaver mode.

Low Fuel Warning Light

English Shown, Metric Similar

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light is a circlelocated on the fuel gauge. This lightcomes on and a chime soundsperiodically when the vehicle is lowon fuel. The light goes off when fuelis added to the fuel tank.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see FuelSystem Messages on page 5-28 formore information.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2-14.



High-Beam On Light

The high‐beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-1 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The front fog lamp light comes onwhen the fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6-3.

Lamps On Reminder

For vehicles with the lamps onreminder light, it comes on when thelights are in use.

Cruise Control Light

For vehicles with cruise control, thecruise control light is white when thecruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise controlis set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9-35.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The vehicle may have a DriverInformation Center (DIC). It displaysinformation about the vehicle andwarning messages if there is asystem problem detected. DICmessages display in the center ofthe instrument cluster. See VehicleMessages on page 5-25.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-32.

DIC Operation and Displays

Use the DIC buttons located in thecenter of the instrument panel toaccess different displays. The DICdisplays trip, fuel, vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages.It also shows the shift lever position,the odometer, and the direction thevehicle is driving.

DIC Buttons

MENU: Press this button to get tothe Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu.

Q or R : Use these buttons toscroll through the items in eachmenu. A small marker will movealong the page as you scroll throughthe items. This shows where eachpage is in the menu.

SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Use thisbutton to set or clear the menu itemwhen it is displayed.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press the MENU button until Trip/Fuel Information Menu is displayed.Then press R to scroll through thefollowing menu items:. Digital Speedometer. Trip 1. Trip 2. Fuel Range. Average Fuel Economy. Best Average Fuel Economy. Average Vehicle Speed. Timer. Navigation. Blank Display

Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.



Trip 1 and Trip 2

This display shows the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing SET/CLR while thetrip odometer display is showing.

Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average Fuel Economy

This display shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg).This number is calculated based onthe number of L/100 km (mpg)recorded since the last time thismenu item was reset. The fueleconomy can be reset by pressing

SET/CLR while the Average FuelEconomy display is showing. Thedisplay may not reset to zero.

Best Average Fuel Economy

The right hand side displays thebest average fuel economy (AFE)that is achieved for a selecteddistance. The left hand side displaysa running average of fuel economyfor the most recently traveledselected distance. The center of theBest AFE menu includes a digitalreadout and bar graph to show theinstantaneous fuel economy.Quickly press the SET/CLR buttonto display a page for selecting oneof the distance options. Move theup/down arrow to choose theselection, and SET/CLR to changethe setting.

When viewing best AFE, a severalsecond press and hold of SET/CLRwill reset the best value. The bestvalue will show “- - -” until theselected distance has beentraveled.

The display provides feedback onhow current driving behavior in thebar graph affects the runningaverage in the left display and howwell recent driving compares to thebest that has been achieved.

Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average VehicleSpeed display is showing.

Timer

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET/CLRwhile Timer is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time theignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is being



shown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SET/CLR.

Navigation

This display is used for the OnStaror Navigation System Turn-by-Turnguidance, if equipped. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1 or theInfotainment manual, if equipped.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press the MENU button until VehicleInformation Menu is displayed. Thenpress R to scroll through thefollowing menu items:. Unit. Tire Pressure

. Remaining Oil Life

. Blank Display

Unit

Press SET/CLR to enter the unitmenu. Then press Q or R to switchbetween METRIC or US when theUnit display is active. Press SET/CLR to confirm the setting. This willchange the displays on the clusterand DIC to either metric or English(US) measurements.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either kilopascal (kPa) or inpounds per square inch (psi).

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-46 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10-47.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-27. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-8. In additionto the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11-3.



Remember, the Oil Life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press SET/CLR while the Oil Life display isactive. The display will ask forconfirmation of a reset. Press Q orR to select Yes or No. Then pressSET/CLR to confirm the selection.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-11.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Compass

The vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Compass on page 5-4.

Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by thedriver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you can pressSET/CLR to acknowledge that youreceived the messages and to clearthem from the display. Somemessages cannot be cleared fromthe DIC display because they aremore urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will onlymake the messages disappear, notcorrect the problem. You will find thepossible messages that can bedisplayed and some informationabout them grouped by subject inthe following information.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing features ofthe vehicle that may be noticed. Atthe point that features are disabled,this message displays. Turn offunnecessary accessories to allowthe battery to recharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10-23.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.



Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low; see BrakeFluid on page 10-22.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed as areminder that the parking brake ison. Release it before you attempt todrive.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5-4.

– –Dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Cruise Control Messages

APPLY BRAKE BEFORECRUISE

If this message displays whenattempting to activate cruise control,apply the brake pedal and try again.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9-35.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR OPEN

A door open symbol will bedisplayed on the DIC showing whichdoor is open. If the vehicle has beenshifted out of P (Park), a DOOROPEN message will also bedisplayed. Close the doorcompletely.

MANUALLY CLOSE THEPOWER LIFTGATE

This message will display if thepower liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle.After removing the obstructions, theliftgate will resume normal poweroperation.

REAR ACCESS OPEN

This message will display along witha symbol when the liftgate is open.Close the liftgate completely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.



When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. The vehicle can continue to bedriven.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADDCOOLANT

This message will display if thecoolant is low. See Engine Coolanton page 10-15.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reaches

unsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

HIGH COOLANTTEMPERATURE

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot. See EngineOverheating on page 10-18.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil Life System onpage 10-11, Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-22, EngineOil on page 10-8, and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and thismessage remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil on page 10-8.

OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.



Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

ECO MODE ON

On some models, this messagedisplays when the Fuel EconomyMode has been turned on by

pressing the eco button near theshift lever. See Fuel Economy Modeon page 9-29.

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced.

Object Detection SystemMessages

FORWARD COLLISIONALERT OFF

If your vehicle has the ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) system, thismessage may display if the FCAsystem cannot activate due to atemporary condition. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System onpage 9-37.

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED,CLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when theLane Departure Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)systems are disabled because thecamera view is blocked and cannotoperate properly. It may alsoactivate during heavy rain or due toroad spray. To clean the system,clean the outside of the windshieldarea in front of the LDW/FCAcamera sensor.



LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

If your vehicle has the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) system,this message may display if theLDW system cannot activate due toa temporary condition. See LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) onpage 9-43 for more information.

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when thepark assist system has been turnedoff or when there is a temporarycondition causing the system to bedisabled. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9-39.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

This message displays when theLane Departure Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)systems are disabled and needservice. See your dealer.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system. Donot use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9-39 for more information.

Ride Control SystemMessages

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when there is a temporarycondition making the AWD systemunavailable. The vehicle will run intwo-wheel drive. This could becaused by:. A compact spare tire on the

vehicle.. AWD system overheat.. Loss of wheel or vehicle speed.. Certain other vehicle electrical

conditions.

This message turns off when thecompact spare tire is replaced by afull-size tire, the differential fluidcools or the above conditions are nolonger present and the warningmessage is reset. To reset thewarning message manually, turn theignition off and then back on againafter 30 seconds. If the messagestays on, see your dealer.

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE

This message displays if a problemoccurs with the All-Wheel Drive(AWD) system. The vehicle will runin two-wheel drive. This could becaused by:. An electronics problem.. Worn out or overheated clutch

plates.. Various electrical issues.

If this message appears, stop assoon as possible and turn off theignition for 30 seconds. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the message



still displays or appears again whenyou begin driving, the system needsservice. See your dealer right away.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-33.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-33.

STABILITRAK OFF

This message displays when theStabiliTrak system is turned off. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl on page 9-33.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isfirst turned on. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-33.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the power steeringsystem and a chime may sound.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-47.



TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-47.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

This message displays when thepressure in one or more of the tiresis low.

This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatethe location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5-19.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10-37, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-14, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-44.

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. TheDIC also shows the tire pressurevalues. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-22.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe ignition or from the vehicle if thevehicle is not in P (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.

Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message is displayed when iceconditions are possible.

TURN WIPER CONTROL TOINTERMITTENT FIRST

This message is displayed whenattempting to adjust the intermittentwiper speed without intermittentselected on the wiper control. SeeWindshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.



VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings Menu.

MENU/SEL Knob: Press thecenter of this knob to enter themenus and select menu items. Turnthe knob to scroll through themenus.

E BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Turn the infotainment system onand press the CONFIG button toaccess the ConfigurationSettings menu.

2. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight Vehicle Settings.

3. Press the center of the MENU/SEL knob to select the VehicleSettings menu.

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Languages. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start. Return to Factory Settings

Each of the menus is detailed in thefollowing information.

Climate and Air Quality

Select and the following maydisplay:. Auto Fan Speed. Air Conditioning Mode. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This selection is available onvehicles with the Automatic ClimateControl System. Choose from thefollowing blower speed settings:

High: Increased speed.

Low: Reduced speed.

Normal: Moderate speed.

Air Conditioning Mode

This will allow you to select whetheror not the air conditioning comes onautomatically the next time thevehicle is started. On means thatthe air conditioning will be on atstart up, regardless of whether it



was on or off the last time thevehicle was turned off. Off meansthe air conditioning will be off at thenext start up, regardless of whetherit was on or off the last time thevehicle was turned off. Last Settingmeans that when the vehicle isstarted, the air conditioning willresume whichever setting it was atthe last time the vehicle wasturned off.

Select On, Off, or Last Setting.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

When on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using remotestart on cold days.

Select On or Off.

Auto Defog

When turned on and high humidityis detected, the climate controlsystem may adjust to outside airsupply and turn on the airconditioner or the heater. The fanspeed may slightly increase to help

prevent fogging. When highhumidity is no longer detected, thesystem will return to its prioroperation.

Select On or Off.

Auto Rear Defog

When on, this feature turns on therear defogger at vehicle start whenthe interior temperature is cold andfog is likely. The auto rear defogfunction can be disabled bypressing1. When off, the feature

can be turned on by pressing1.See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8-1 or Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8-3.

Select On or Off.

Comfort and Convenience

Select and the following maydisplay:. Easy Exit Driver Seat. Chime Volume

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

. Memory Remote Recall

Easy Exit Driver Seat

When on, this feature will move thedriver seat rearward upon turningthe ignition off and the driver dooropening. This may be performed tomake it easier to exit the vehicle.See the “Easy Exit Driver Seat”under Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-4.

Select On or Off.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Select Normal or High.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.



They will return to their previousdriving position when the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse), theignition is turned to OFF, or thevehicle is left in R (Reverse). SeeReverse Tilt Mirrors on page 2-17.

Select On or Off.

Memory Remote Recall

This allows the Memory RemoteRecall feature to be turned on or off.

When on, this feature will recall thecurrent driver's seat, and outsidemirror positions upon unlocking thedriver door with the RKE, andopening that door. The current driveris identified when the RKEtransmitter is used to unlock thedriver door. See “Memory RemoteRecall” under Memory Seats onpage 3-6.

Memory Remote Recall is when thememorized settings will be recalledas you unlock the vehicle.

Select On or Off.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select and the following maydisplay:. Park Assist

Park Assist

This allows the Ultrasonic ParkingAssist feature to be turned on or off.

Select On, Off, or On with Tow BarAttached.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9-39.

Languages

Select Languages, then select fromthe available language(s).

Lighting

Select and the following maydisplay:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off.

Select On or Off.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute,or 2 Minutes.

Power Door Locks

Select and the following maydisplay:. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable.



Select On or Off.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select All Doors, Driver Door, or Off.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. If you want tooverride the delay you can press thepower door lock on the instrumentpanel.

Select On or Off.

Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select and the following maydisplay:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Select Flash Lights or Off.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when unlockingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Lights and Horn, Lights Only,Horn Only, or Off.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Return to Factory Settings

Select Return to Factory Settings toreturn all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings.

Select Yes or On.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. Theseinstructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.



Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read these instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.

Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons with theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one of thethree Universal Remote systembuttons to be used to operatethe garage door. Do not releaseeither button until the indicatorlight changes from a slow to arapid flash. Then release bothbuttons.

Some garage door openers mayrequire substitution of Step 2with the procedure under “RadioSignals for Canada and SomeGate Operators” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicator lightand garage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on

continuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, then



programming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light doesnot come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press maybe required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3 ,locate the Learn or Smart buttoninside garage on the garagedoor opener receiver. The nameand color of the button may varyby manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote system buttonfor two seconds and thenrelease it. If the garage doordoes not move or the lamp onthe garage door opener receiver

does not flash, press and holdthe same button a second timefor two seconds, then release it.Again, if the door does not moveor the garage door lamp doesnot flash, press and hold thesame button a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming helpcall 1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long



enough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This should takeabout 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Battery Load Management . . . . 6-5

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal lever.

There are four positions.

O (Exterior Lamp Control):Operates the exterior lamps. Turn toone of the following positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamps):Turns the exterior lamps on and offautomatically depending on theexterior light. The vehicle will defaultto the AUTO setting when it is firststarted.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with theparking lamps and instrument panellights.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger: Push the turn signallever away from you and release, toturn the high beams on. To return tolow beams, push the lever again orpull it toward you and release.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.


6-2 Lighting

Flash-to-PassThe flash-to-pass feature works withthe low beams or Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) on or off.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever all the way towardyou, then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness in daylight whenthe following conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.. The transmission is not in

P (Park).. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.. The parking brake is released.

Fully functional DRL are required onall vehicles first sold in Canada.

When the DRL are on the taillamps,sidemarker, instrument panel lightsand other lamps will not be on. Theinstrument cluster will be lit.

When the exterior lamp control isturned to5, the low-beamheadlamps come on. The otherlamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

To idle your vehicle with the DRLoff, move the shift lever to P (Park).The DRL will stay off until the shiftlever is moved out of the P (Park)position.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theheadlamps come on automatically.

Do not cover the light sensor on topof the instrument panel or theheadlamps will come on when theyare not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers are


Lighting 6-3

not operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button, on the center ofthe instrument panel, to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warns othersthat you are having trouble.

Press| again to turn theflashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterwill flash in the direction of the turnor lane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is complete. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb maybe burned out.

Have any burned out bulbsreplaced. If a bulb is not burned out,check the fuse; see Fuses onpage 10-31.

Fog Lamps

For vehicles with fog lamps, thecontrol is located on the turn signallever.

Use the fog lamps for better visionin foggy or misty conditions.


6-4 Lighting

# FOG (Fog Lamps): Turn the foglamp band on the lever to # andrelease it, to turn the fog lamps onor off. The band will return to itsoriginal position.

The parking lamps or low-beamheadlamps must be on to use thefog lamps.

The fog lamps will go off wheneverthe high-beam headlamps areturned on. When the high-beamheadlamps are turned off, the foglamps will come on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThis control is located on theinstrument panel, to the left of thesteering column.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe lights.

Dome LampsThere are front and rear domelamps.

The dome lamp controls are locatedin the overhead console. To changethe settings, press the following:

* (Dome Lamp Override): Turnsthe lamps off, even when a dooris open.

1 (Door): The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

+ (On): Turns the dome lamps on.

The dome lamps can also be turnedon and off by pressing the buttonsnext to the lamps.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located onthe overhead console. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

For manual operation, press thebutton next to each lamp to turn iton or off.


Lighting 6-5

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe dome lamp, cargo lamp, andfoot lamp inside the vehicle comeon when any door is opened, if thedome lamp is in the door position. Inaddition, these lamps come onwhen the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) unlock button is pressed.They stay on for 20 seconds or untila door is opened. After the door isopened and then closed, the lightremains on for 20 seconds, or untilthe ignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all of thepower needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed and it is recommendedthat the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible. SeeBattery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5-25.


6-6 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-21Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.


7-2 Infotainment System

This system provides access tomany audio and non-audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9-3.

This vehicle's infotainment systemmay be equipped with a noisereduction system which can workimproperly if the audio amplifier,engine calibrations, exhaust system,microphones, radio, or speakers aremodified or replaced. This couldresult in more noticeable enginenoise at certain speeds.

{ Caution

Contact your dealer before addingany equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere with theoperation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-23 for moreinformation.

Navigation System

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, see the infotainmentmanual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.



Overview 1. VOL/ O (Volume/Power)

2. g SEEK

3. FAV (Favorite Pages)

4. RADIO/BAND

5. Preset Buttons 1–6

6. AUX (Auxiliary)

7. E BACK

8. INFO (Information)

9. MENU/SEL (Menu/Select)

10. k (Play/Pause)

11. CD Player

12. 5 / ? (Phone/Mute)

13. l SEEK

14. H (Clock)

15. CONFIG (Configuration Menu)

16. X (CD Eject)

17. TONE



Operation

Controls

The infotainment system is operatedby using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, display menus,and steering wheel controls,if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press toturn the system on and off.

Automatic Switch-Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn toadjust the volume.

5 / ? (Mute): For vehicles withOnStar, press and hold 5 / ? tomute the infotainment system. Pressand hold 5 / ? again, or turn the

VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.

For vehicles without OnStar, press5 / ? to mute the infotainmentsystem. Press 5 / ? again, or turn

the VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.

Menu System

Controls

The MENU/SEL knob and theEBACK button are used to navigatethe menu system.

MENU/SEL (Menu/Select):Press to:. Enter the menu system.. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.

Turn to:. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

E BACK: Press to:. Exit a menu.. Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.. Delete the last character in a

sequence.

RADIO/BAND: Press to:. Displays menu of AM, FM, XM,

CD, or AUX.. Press to toggle through menu.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tomove the highlighted bar.



2. Press the MENU/SEL button toselect the highlighted option.

Submenus

An arrow on the right-hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Activating a Setting

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toactivate the setting.

Setting a Value

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tochange the current value of thesetting.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toconfirm the setting.

Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the function.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toturn the function on or off.

Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the character.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toselect the character.

Press theE BACK button todelete the last character in thesequence or press and hold todelete the entire charactersequence.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.



3. Press and hold the MENU/SELbutton until the value changesto 0.

Press theE BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles that have an equalizer:


2. Select EQ.

3. Select the setting.


System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press theE BACK button togo back to the SystemConfiguration menu.



Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.



Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe radio is first turned on canbe set.



3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, SiriusXM®, if equipped, CD,or AUX.

MENU/SEL: Turn to manuallysearch for stations.

FAV: Press to open thefavorites list.

l SEEK org SEEK: Press tosearch for stations. Press and holdto scan for stations.

k : Press to pause the CD.

1 to 6: Press to select presetstations.



RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This feature only workswhen the information from the radiostation is available. In rare cases, aradio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Press the MENU/SEL knob to openthe main radio menu for that band.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose AM, FM, or SiriusXM,if equipped. The last station thatwas playing starts playing again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly pressg SEEK orl SEEK,to automatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and holdg SEEK orlSEEK until the station on thedisplay is reached, then release thebutton.

Manual Tuning

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to selectthe frequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.

Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed. If astation list has not been created,an automatic station searchis done.


Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations sorted by program type inthe FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM category list. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.



3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updatedwhen the station lists areupdated.

Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:


2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored in thestation list are no longerreceived. A station search will becompleted and the first station inthe updated list will play.

To cancel the station search, pressthe MENU/SEL knob.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingbutton 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to switch to anotherfavorite page. Briefly press one ofthe 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve thestation.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an SiriusXM® SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid SiriusXMSatellite Radio subscription canreceive SiriusXM programming.


SiriusXM is a satellite radio servicebased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.If SiriusXM service needs to bereactivated, the radio will display“No Subscription Please Renew onchannel XM1.” A service fee isrequired to receive the SiriusXMservice. For more information,contact SiriusXM atwww.siriusxm.com or1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), andwww.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079(Canada).

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theSiriusXM radio are:

RADIO/BAND: Press to turn theradio on and choose between AM,FM, and SiriusXM, if equipped.

g SEEK orl SEEK: Press to goto the previous or next station.

FAV: Press to open thefavorites list.



1 to 6: Press to select presetstations.

MENU/SEL: Turn to select stations.Press to open the SiriusXM SatelliteRadio menu.

Selecting the SiriusXM Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose between the AM, FM, andSiriusXM bands. The last channelplayed in that band begins to playwhen that band is selected.

Removing or AddingCategories

SiriusXM channels are organized incategories.

Channels in a category that havebeen removed can still be accessedby using theg SEEK orl SEEKbuttons, or the MENU/SEL knob.

To add or remove categories:



3. Select XM Categories.

4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the category.

5. Press the MENU/SEL knob toremove or add the category.

Selecting a SiriusXM Channel

SiriusXM channels can be selectedby usingg SEEK,l SEEK, theMENU/SEL knob, or the menusystem.

Selecting a Channel UsinggSEEK orl SEEK

. Press and releaseg SEEK orl SEEK to go to the previousor next channel.

. Press and holdg SEEK orlSEEK to scroll through theprevious or next channel untilthe channel is reached.

Selecting a Channel Using theMENU/SEL Knob

To select an XM channel using theMENU/SEL knob:

Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight an XM channel. Thechannel is selected after a shortdelay.

To select a channel using the menu:

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob andselect Channel List.

2. Select the desired channel.

Selecting a Channel Using theMenu System

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select XM Category List.

3. Select the category.

4. Select the channel.

Storing a SiriusXM Channel as aFavorite

Channels from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.



Up to six channels can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing a Channel as a Favorite

To store the channel to a position inthe list, press and hold thecorresponding 1 to 6 button until thechannel can be heard again.

Retrieving Channels

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to change toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe channel.

Turning SiriusXM ChannelGraphics On or Off

1. From the Home Page press theConfig screen button or theCONFIG button on the faceplate.

2. Select Radio Settings from theConfig Menu list.

3. Select XM Channel Graphics toturn on or off.

SiriusXM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.) or1-877-209-0079 (Canada).

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, noaction is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data; no action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour SiriusXM subscription package.

Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation.

No Artist Info: The system isworking properly. No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Title Info: The system isworking properly. No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No CAT Info: The system isworking properly. No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Information: The system isworking properly. No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel.

No Subscription Please Renew:The SiriusXM subscription needs tobe reactivated. contact SiriusXM atwww.siriusxm.com or1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), andwww.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079(Canada).



No XM Signal: The system isworking properly. The vehicle maybe in a location where the XM signalis being blocked. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, thesignal should return.

CAT Not Found: The system isworking properly. There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theSiriusXM Radio eight-digit radio IDlabel. This label is needed toactivate the service.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

See the infotainment manual.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can occur whenthings like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. Whenthis happens, try reducing the trebleon the radio.


SiriusXM Satellite Radio Servicegives digital radio reception fromcoast to coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the SiriusXM signal for a periodof time.



Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage can causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for the AM-FM radio, OnStar,the SiriusXM Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, and GPS (GlobalPositioning System), if the vehiclehas these features. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear reception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, and it isopen, reception can also beaffected.

Audio Players

CD PlayerSee the infotainment manual formore information.

The player can be used for CD andMP3 audio.

With the vehicle on, insert a discinto the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and begins playing.While playing, the navigationsystem is available.

The system is capable of playing:. Most audio CDs. CD-R. CD-RW. MP3 or unprotected WMA

formats

When playing any compatiblerecordable disc, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to disc quality,the method of recording, the quality

of the music that has beenrecorded, or the way the disc hasbeen handled.

There can be increased skipping,difficulty in recording tracks,difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting.If these problems occur, check thedisc for damage or try a knowngood disc.

To avoid damage to the CD player:. Do not use scratched or

damaged discs.. Do not apply labels to discs. The

labels could get caught in theplayer.

. Insert only one disc at a time.

. Keep the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

. Use a marking pen to label thetop of the disc.



Loading and Ejecting Discs

To load a disc:

1. Turn the vehicle on.

2. Insert a disc into the slot, labelside up. The player pulls it in therest of the way. If the disc isdamaged or improperly loaded,there is an error and the discejects.

The disc automatically plays onceloaded.

PressX to eject a disc from theCD player. If the disc is not removedwithin a short period of time, it isautomatically pulled back into theplayer.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

CD: Press to choose between theCD and AUX player.

l SEEK org SEEK: Press toselect tracks or to fast forward orrewind within a track.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the CD that maybe available.

MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks.

X (Eject): Press to removethe CD.

k : Press to pause a CD or MP3track; press again to resumeplayback.

Playing an Audio CD

Press the CD button. If there is adisc in the player it begins playing.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Pressg SEEK orl SEEK toselect the previous or next track.

. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Tracks list.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Press the MENU/SEL knob andthen set Shuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and holdl SEEK orgSEEK to fast forward or rewindwithin the current track.

Selecting an MP3 Track

Using the control buttons:

. Pressg SEEK orl SEEK toselect the previous or next track.

. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists/Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.




Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.

Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Error Messages

If Disc Error displays and/or the disccomes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:. The disc has an invalid or

unknown format.. The disc is very hot. Try the disc

again when the temperaturereturns to normal.

. The road is very rough. Try thedisc again when the road issmoother.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. Try thedisc again later.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error continues, contact yourdealer.

MP3

Playing an MP3 CD

See the infotainment manual formore information.

To play an MP3 CD, follow the sameinstructions as “Playing anAudio CD.”

The following guidelines must bemet when creating an MP3 disc,otherwise the CD might not play:. Sampling rate: 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.

. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,and 320 kbps.

. Maximum number of folders:eight folders with 255 files perfolder.

. Maximum of 1,000 files ona disc.



. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RWwith a maximum capacity of700 MB.

. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/Genre information requires a CDto be fully scanned before themusic navigator works withthese menus.

MP3 Music Menu

Press the Menu screen button whilethat source is active to accessthe menu.

Press any of the following buttonson the MP3 Menu:

Shuffle Songs: Press to play thetracks randomly. Press again to stopshuffle.

Playlists: Press to view theplaylists stored on the disc. Select aplaylist to view the list of all songs inthat playlist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Artists: Press to view the list ofartists stored on the disc. Select anartist name to view a list of all songsby the artist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Albums: Press to view the albumson the disc. Select the album toview a list of all songs on the album.There might be a delay before thelist displays. Select a song from thelist to begin playback.

Song Titles: Press to display a listof all songs on the disc. Songs aredisplayed as stored on the disc.There might be a delay before thelist displays. To begin playback,select a song from the list.

Genres: Press to view the genres.Select a genre to view a list of allsongs of that genre. Select a songfrom the list to begin playback.

Folders: Press to open a folder listto access the files within the folderstructure.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. All files contained directlyunder the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders.

Empty Folders

If a root directory or folder is emptyor contains only folders, the playeradvances to the next folder in thefile structure that contains acompressed audio file. The emptyfolder(s) are not displayed ornumbered.

No Folder

When the CD only containscompressed audio files without anyfolders or playlists, all files areunder the root folder.

File System and Naming

The song titles, artists, albums, andgenres are taken from the file's ID3tag and are only displayed if presentin the tag. If a song title is not



present in the ID3 tag, the radiodisplays the file name as thetrack name.

Preprogrammed Playlists

The radio recognizespreprogrammed playlists; however,there is no editing capability. Theseplaylists are treated as specialfolders containing compressedaudio song files.

Auxiliary DevicesSee the infotainment manual formore information.

This vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput jack in the center console,If equipped. Possible auxiliary audiosources include:. Laptop computer. MP3 player. Tape player

The auxiliary input allows portabledevices to be connected using the3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or theUSB port.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7-4.

This jack is not an audio output. Donot plug headphones into theauxiliary input jack. Drivers areencouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is inP (Park).

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cablefrom the auxiliary device to theauxiliary input jack. When a deviceis connected, the system

automatically begins playing audiofrom the device over the vehiclespeakers.

Playback of an audio deviceconnected to the 3.5 mm auxiliaryinput jack can only be controlledusing the controls on the device.

Playing from a USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem.. iPods®

. PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)

. USB Drives

. Zunes®

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system.

Connecting and Controllingan iPod®

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.



Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Searching for a Track

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres. Audiobooks. Composers



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audiobooks, or Composers.


Shuffle

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to On orOff, then press theE BACKbutton to return to the main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then press theE BACK button to return to themain screen.

On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Playback starts from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.

Searching for a Track

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.


Shuffle Functionality

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.



Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

USB Menu

Select any of the following buttonson the USB Menu:

Shuffle Songs: Select to play thetracks randomly. Select again tostop shuffle.

Playlists: Select to view theplaylists stored on the USB. Selecta playlist to view the list of all songsin that playlist. There might be adelay before the list displays. Selecta song from the list to beginplayback.

Artists: Select to view the list ofartists stored on the USB. Select anartist name to view a list of allalbums by the artist. There might bea delay before the list displays. Toselect a song, touch All Songs thenselect a song or touch an albumthen select a song from the list tobegin playback.

Albums: Select to view the albumson the USB. Select the album toview a list of all songs on the album.There might be a delay before thelist displays. Select a song from thelist to begin playback.

Song Titles: Select to display a listof all songs on the USB. Songs aredisplayed as stored on the disc.There might be a delay before thelist displays. To begin playback,select a song from the list.

Genres: Select to view the genreson the USB. Select a genre to viewa list of all songs of that genre.Select a song from the list to beginplayback.

Folders: Select to open a folder listto access the files within the folderstructure.

File System and Naming

The song titles, artists, albums, andgenres are taken from the file's ID3tag and are only displayed if presentin the tag. If a song title is notpresent in the ID3 tag, the radiodisplays the file name as thetrack name.

Playing from an iPod®

This feature supports the followingiPod models:. iPod nano (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th

generation). iPod with video (5.0 and 5.5

generation). Video is not shown;only audio is supported.

. iPod classic (6th generation)

. iPod touch (1st and 2ndgeneration)



There may be problems withoperation and function in thefollowing situations:. When connecting an iPod on

which a more recent version ofthe firmware is installed than issupported by the infotainmentsystem.

. When connecting an iPod onwhich firmware from otherproviders is installed.

To connect and control an iPod,connect one end of the standardiPod USB cable to the iPod's dockconnector. Connect the other end tothe USB port in the center console.

iPod music information displays onthe radio’s display and beginsplaying through the vehicle’s audiosystem.

The iPod battery rechargesautomatically while the vehicle is on.When the vehicle is off while aniPod is connected using the iPod

USB cable, the iPod battery stopscharging and the iPod automaticallyturns off.

If the iPod is an unsupported model,it can still be listened to in thevehicle by connecting to theauxiliary input jack using a standard3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.

Shuffle Songs: Select to play thetracks randomly. Select again tostop shuffle.

Press any of the following buttonson the iPod Menu:

Playlists:

1. Press to view the playlists storedon the iPod.

2. Select a playlist name to view alist of all songs in the playlist.

3. Select the desired song from thelist to begin playback.

Artists:

1. Press to view the artists storedon the iPod.

2. Select an artist name to view alist of all songs by the artist.


Albums:

1. Press to view the albums storedon the iPod.

2. Select an album name to view alist of all songs on the album orselect All Songs to view allsongsby the artist.


Song Titles:

1. Press to view a list of all songsstored on the iPod.


Genres:

1. Press to view the genres storedon the iPod.

2. Select a genre name to view alist of artists of that genre.



3. Select an artist to view albumsor All Songs to view all songs ofthat genre.

4. Select album to view songs.


Podcasts:

1. Press to view the podcastsstored on the iPod.

2. Select a podcast name to playthe desired podcast.

Composers:

1. Press to view the composersstored on the iPod.

2. Select a composer name to viewa list of all songs by thatcomposer.


Audio Books:

1. Press to view the audio booksstored on the iPod.

2. Select an audio book name toview a list of all audio books.

3. Select the desired audio bookfrom the list to begin playback.

Playing from an iPhone®

This feature supports the followingiPhone model:. iPhone (3Gs – 5)

To use the iPhone, follow the sameinstructions as stated earlier forusing an iPod.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)See the infotainment manual formore information.

For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.



. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section.

{ Warning

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment system.Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth-capable cellphone with a Hands-Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Theinfotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m(30 ft). Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.


b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.

> /i (End Call/Mute): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Infotainment System Controls

If equipped, the infotainment systemallows certain controls to beselected on the infotainment display.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7-4.

5 or 5 \ ? (PHONE/MUTE): Pressto enter the Phone main menu.Press 5 \ ? to mute the audiosystem.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.



When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use theVOL/ O knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls. See theinfotainment manual.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available.See OnStarOverview on page 14-1 for moreinformation.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone


2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings.



3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)appears on the display. The PINis used in Step 6.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

6. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 4. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone to link toand follow the on screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone's owner's guideor contact your wireless provider tofind out if this feature is supportedby your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.



The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. Press 5 or 5 \ ? once or twice(depending on the radio).

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the MENU/SEL buttonto scroll through the entire list ofnames/numbers in thephone book.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

Making a Call

To make a call:


2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7-4 for more information.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/SELknob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/SELknob to decline the call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/SELknob to accept the call.



Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/SELknob to decline the call.

Switching Between Calls (CallWaiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three-waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Enter Number.

3. Enter the character sequencethen select Call. See “Entering aCharacter Sequence” inOperation on page 7-4 for moreinformation.

4. After the call has been placed,turn or press the MENU/SELknob and choose Merge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 1through 4. The number of callersthat can be added is limited byyour wireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the MENU/SEL knoband select Hang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn or press the MENU/SEL knoband select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the MENU/SEL knoband select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.

1. Turn or press the MENU/SELknob and select Enter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7-4 for more information.

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Using Voice Recognition

See the infotainment manual formore information.

To use voice recognition, press theb / g button located on the steeringwheel. Use the commands below forthe various voice features. Foradditional information, say “Help”while you are in a voicerecognition menu.



Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1 for moreinformation.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.



Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands-Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.



Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.



Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Calling 911 Emergency



3. Say "911."


Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heard

followed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” Thesystem dials the last numbercalled from the connected cellphone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Press > /i to ignore a call.



Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press > /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press > /i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g , andthen say “Un-mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.



Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on “Deleting aPaired Phone” and “Storing andDeleting Name Tags.”



Trademarks andLicense Agreements

Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbol areregistered trademarks and DTSDigital Surround and the DTS logosare trademarks of DTS, Inc. Productincludes software. All RightsReserved.

Manufactured under license fromDolby® Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are registeredtrademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

"Made for iPod and iPhone" meansthat an electronic accessory hasbeen designed to connectspecifically to iPod or iPhone,

respectively, and has been certifiedby the developer to meet Appleperformance standards. Apple is notresponsible for the operation of thisdevice or its compliance with safetyand regulatory standards. Pleasenote that the use of this accessorywith iPod or iPhone may affectwireless preformance.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPodnano, and iPod touch aretrademarks of Apple Inc., registeredin the U.S. and other countries.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Climate Control Systems

The vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlledwith this system.

1. Fan Control



4. Outside Air

5. Front Defrost


7. Recirculation

8. Air Conditioning


8-2 Climate Controls

A (Fan Control): Turn to increaseor decrease the fan speed. Turn theknob completely to T to turn thefan off.

Temperature Control: Turn toincrease or decrease thetemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Tochange the current mode, selectone of the following:

F (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

7 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

W (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 FRONT (Front Defrost): Clearsthe windshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

If equipped with the Fuel EconomyMode, the climate controls may takelonger to heat or cool the cabin andthe rear window defogger will turnoff sooner, when this feature is inuse. See Fuel Economy Mode onpage 9-29.

Air Conditioning

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on or off.If the fan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioning will not work.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation. An indicatorlight comes on. Air is recirculatedinside the vehicle. It helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle orprevent outside air and odors fromentering. The air conditioning maycome on under certain conditions.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. To overridethis feature, select outside air.

% (Outside Air): Press to turnon the outside air. An indicator lightcomes on. Outside air is circulatedthroughout the vehicle.

Rear Window Defogger

1 REAR (Rear Defogger): Pressto turn the rear window defogger onor off. The rear window defoggerturns off after about 10 minutes.It can also be turned off by turningthe ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF. If turned on again, itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off.

The ignition must be on to use therear window defogger.




{ Caution

Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow. Do not adhere anythingto the defogger grid lines in therear glass. These actions maydamage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Automatic Climate Control SystemThe vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlledwith this system.

1. Fan Control

2. AUTO (Automatic Operation)


4. Front Defrost

5. Recirculation


7. Power

8. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats


10. Air Conditioning



Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation toheat or cool the vehicle to theselected temperature.

When the AUTO indicator light ison, the system is in full automaticoperation.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster,recirculation may beautomatically selected in warmweather. The recirculation lightwill not come on. Press thehto select recirculation; press itagain to select outside air.

Manual Operation

O (Power): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.

A (Fan Control): Turn to increaseor decrease the fan speed.Adjusting the fan speed while inautomatic mode places the fanunder manual control. The AUTOindicator light turns off. The airdelivery mode remains in automaticcontrol.

Temperature Control: Turn toincrease or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

H / G (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press mode up or modedown to cycle through the differentair delivery modes. The currentmode is shown on the display.

Select from the following:

F (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

7 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

W (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 FRONT (Front Defrost): Clearsthe windshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.Selecting defrost disables theautomatic mode.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.


For vehicles with Fuel EconomyMode, the climate controls may takelonger to heat or cool the cabin andthe rear window defogger will turnoff sooner, when this feature is inuse. See Fuel Economy Mode onpage 9-29.



Air Conditioning

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on or off.If the fan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioning will not work. Whenin AUTO, the air conditioning willcome on automatically as needed.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation. Press toalternate between recirculation andoutside air, if the vehicle does nothave a separate outside air button.

The indicator light turns on whenrecirculation is selected. Air isrecirculated inside the vehicle.It helps quickly cool the air insidethe vehicle or prevent outside airand odors from entering.

% (Outside Air, If Equipped):Press to turn on the outside air. Anindicator light comes on. Outside airis circulated throughout the vehicle.

Rear Window Defogger

1 REAR (Rear Defogger): Pressto turn the rear window defogger onor off. The rear window defoggerturns off after about 10 minutes.It can also be turned off by puttingthe ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF. If turned on again, itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off.

The ignition must be on to use therear window defogger.


{ Caution

Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow. Do not adhere anythingto the defogger grid lines in therear glass. These actions maydamage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

L / M (Driver and PassengerHeated Seats): If equipped withheated seats, see Heated FrontSeats on page 3-8.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: If equipped with theremote start feature, the climatecontrol system may run when thevehicle is started remotely. Thesystem uses the driver’s previoussettings to heat or cool the inside ofthe vehicle. The rear defog maycome on during remote start basedon cold ambient conditions. Therear defog indicator light does notcome on during a remote start. If thevehicle has heated front seats, theymay come on during a remote start.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-5 and Heated Front Seatson page 3-8.



Sensors

The solar sensor, located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses theinformation to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery mode.

Do not cover the solar sensor or thesystem will not work properly.

Air VentsCenter Air Vents

Use the louvers located on the airvents to change the direction of theairflow. Use the thumbwheels toopen or close off the airflow.

Side Air Vents

Use the louvers located on the airvents to change the direction of theairflow or to open or close off theairflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.

. Do not attach any devices to theair vent slats. This restrictsairflow and may cause damageto the air vents.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3 for replacement intervals.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11-12.

The passenger compartment airfilter can be accessed by removingthe entire glove box.

1. Open the glove box completelyand locate the stop tab on top ofthe glove box door.

2. Push the stop tab upward untilthe stop tab is under theinstrument panel assembly andthe glove box is released.

3. Unsnap the tabs beneath theglove box that connect it to thebottom of the instrument panelassembly.

4. Remove the glove box.

5. Locate the service door for thepassenger compartment air filter.

6. Push the two tabs upward andrelease the latches holding theservice door. Lift theservice door.

7. Remove the old air filter.

8. Install the new air filter.

9. Close the service door andlatches.

10. Reinstall the glove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-10Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-11Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-14Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-19Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 9-23Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-27Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-32

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Driver Assistance SystemsForward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-39Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43


9-2 Driving and Operating

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-46Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-47California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-47Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3-11.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.



If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering (2.4LL4 Engine)

If the vehicle has electric powersteering, it does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time, powerassist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Service VehicleMessages on page 5-30

Hydraulic Power Steering (3.6LV6 Engine)

If your vehicle has hydraulic powersteering, it may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid (2.4L L4 Engine) onpage 10-20 or Power Steering Fluid(3.6L V6 Engine) on page 10-20.

If power steering is lost because theengine stops or a systemmalfunctions, the vehicle can be

steered but may require increasedeffort. See your dealer if there is aproblem.

{ Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionfor more than 15 seconds,damage may occur to the powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.



Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid —too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or other



material on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingAll-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout all-wheel drive and vehiclesnot equipped with All Terrain (AT) orOn-Off Road (OOR) tires must notbe driven off-road except on a level,solid surface. To contact the tiremanufacturer for more informationabout the original equipment tires,

see the Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Informationmanual.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed.

{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you tolose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear safety belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,

and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutall-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Make sure all underbodyshields, if equipped, are properlyattached.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lowerair dam.

{ Caution

Operating the vehicle forextended periods without the frontfascia lower air dam installed cancause improper air flow to theengine. Re-attach the front fasciaair dam after off-road driving.



Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargo areaas far forward and as low aspossible. The heaviest thingsshould be on the floor,forward of the rear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-14.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn on page 9-26.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause lossof control. Driving across hills cancause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain aheadcannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.

When driving on hills:. Use a low gear and keep a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Maintain a slow speed.. When possible, drive straight up

or down the hill.. Slow down when approaching

the top of the hill.



. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident.There could be a drop-off,embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could beseriously injured or killed. As younear the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with the transmissionin N (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.. If driving uphill when the

vehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake.

. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot be restartedafter stalling, set the parkingbrake, shift an automatictransmission into P (Park), andturn the vehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.



3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on thedownhill wheels which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it – a rock, a rut, etc.– and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.

{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving in mud– the deeper the mud, the lower thegear. Keep the vehicle moving toavoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and thevehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.



Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.

{ Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive slowly through it. At fasterspeeds, water splashes on theignition system and the vehicle canstall. Stalling can also occur if youget the exhaust pipe under water.While the exhaust pipe is underwater, you will not be able to startthe engine. When going throughwater, the brakes get wet, and itmight take longer to stop. SeeDriving on Wet Roads onpage 9-10.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody orchassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance serviceis required. Refer to theMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3 for more information.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10-37.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.



{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

If equipped, Traction Control shouldbe turned on. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-33.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9-30.



Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-26.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.



If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-33.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a lowforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.

Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10-68.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.



{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driver'sdoor open, you will find the labelattached near the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seating

positions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (3) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10-37 andTire Pressure on page 10-44.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.



“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manualto determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing on page 9-54for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).



Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the lowercenter pillar on the driver side ofthe vehicle or on the rear edgeof the driver door. The labelshows the size of the vehicle'soriginal tires and the inflationpressures needed to obtain the



gross weight capacity of thevehicle. This is called GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out theload equally on both sides of thecenter line.

Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If the vehicle is carrying a heavyload, it should be spread out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Your warranty does not coverparts or components that failbecause of overloading.

The label will help you decidehow much cargo and installedequipment your vehicle cancarry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change yourweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help you load your vehicle theright way.

If you put things inside yourvehicle – like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else –they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

{ Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

breaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.



{ Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.

1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-23.

This is the only position from whichthe key can be removed. This locksthe steering wheel, ignition andautomatic transmission.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-31.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.


If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition provides power to some ofthe electrical accessories. It unlocksthe steering wheel and ignition. Tomove the key from ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, pushin the key and then turn it toLOCK/OFF.

3 (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, including theventilation fan and 12-volt poweroutlets, as well as to display somewarning and indicator lights. Thisposition can also be used forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of the

malfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. The transmission is alsounlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not start if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

4 (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.

A warning tone sounds when thedriver door is opened if the ignitionis still in ACC/ACCESSORY and thekey is in the ignition. If the ignitionbecomes difficult to turn, see Keyson page 2-1.

Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission are equipped with anelectronic key lock release system.The key lock release is designed toprevent ignition key removal unlessthe shift lever is in P (Park).



Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

{ Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

{ Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionwhile starting the vehicle, damagemay occur to the hydraulic powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine does

not start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

{ Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.



2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Push theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and hold it there as youhold the key in START for amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

{ Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9-57.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the audio system willcontinue to operate for up to10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

Power to the power windows andsunroof will continue to operate forup to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

All these features will work when thekey is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).



To Use The Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

The electrical cord is located onthe passenger side of the enginecompartment, in front of the aircleaner.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Shifting Into Park

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-51.

Use this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9-31for more information.

2. Hold the button on the shift leverand push the lever toward thefront of the vehicle into P (Park).


4. Remove the key.



Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-24. If you are towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-51.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the button and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkTo shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), see your dealerfor service.



Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9-24and Engine Exhaust on page 9-26.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-51.

AutomaticTransmission

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. Use P (Park) whenstarting the engine because thevehicle cannot move easily.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-24 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 9-51.

The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply theregular brake first and then pressthe shift lever button before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition key



is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9-25.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

{ Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-14.

N (Neutral): In this position theengine and transmission do notconnect. Use N (Neutral) to restart avehicle that is already moving.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

{ Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

{ Caution

If the vehicle accelerates slowly,or does not shift gears, thetransmission could be damaged.Have the vehicle servicedright away.



M (Manual Mode): Allows thedriver to select the range of gearpositions. See Manual Mode onpage 9-29.

Manual Mode

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS or manual mode allows for theselection of the range of gearpositions. Use this mode whendriving downhill or towing a trailer tolimit the top gear and vehicle speed.The shift position indicator within theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay a number next to the Mindicating the highest available gearunder manual mode and the drivingconditions when manual mode wasselected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus button onthe shift lever, to increase ordecrease the gear rangeavailable.

When shifting to M (Manual Mode),the transmission will shift to a presetlower gear range. For this presetrange, the highest gear available isdisplayed next to the M in the DIC.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-22 for more information.All gears below that number areavailable to use. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M,1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears areshifted automatically. To shift to5 (Fifth) gear, press the + (Plus)button or shift into D (Drive).

M (Manual Mode) will preventshifting to a lower gear range if theengine speed is too high. If vehiclespeed is not reduced within the timeallowed, the lower gear range shiftwill not be completed. Slow thevehicle, then press the − (Minus)button to the desired lower gearrange.

While using the ERS, cruise controlcan be used.

Fuel Economy ModeVehicles with a 2.4L engine have aFuel Economy Mode. Whenengaged, Fuel Economy Mode canimprove the vehicle's fuel economy.

Press the eco (economy) buttonnext to the shift lever to turn thisfeature on or off. The eco light in theinstrument cluster will come onwhen engaged. See Fuel EconomyLight on page 5-20. A Driver



Information Center (DIC) messageis also displayed. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5-28.

When Fuel Economy Mode is on:. The transmission will upshift

sooner and downshift later.. The torque converter clutch will

apply sooner and stay on longer.. The gas pedal will be less

sensitive.. The vehicle's computer will more

aggressively shut off fuel to theengine under deceleration.

. The engine idle speed will belower.

. Driving performance is moreconservative.

. The climate controls may takelonger to heat or cool the cabin.

. The rear defogger will stay onfor shorter periods of time.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature transferengine power, as required, to allfour wheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact spare tire onan AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and reduces AWDperformance to protect the system.To restore full AWD operation andprevent excessive wear on thesystem, replace the compact sparewith a full-size tire as soon aspossible. See Compact Spare Tireon page 10-64.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5-16.



If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-16.



{ Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the park brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will be on anda chime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9-51.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This featureautomatically uses the stabilitysystem hydraulic brake controlmodule to supplement the powerbrake system under conditionswhere the driver has quickly andforcefully applied the brake pedal inan attempt to quickly stop or slowdown the vehicle. The stabilitysystem hydraulic brake controlmodule increases brake pressure ateach corner of the vehicle until theABS activates. Minor brake pedalpulsation or pedal movement duringthis time is normal and the drivershould continue to apply the brakepedal as the driving situationdictates. The brake assist featurewill automatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has an HSA feature,which may be useful when thevehicle is stopped on a grade. Thisfeature is designed to prevent thevehicle from rolling, either forward orrearward, during vehicle drive off.After the driver completely stopsand holds the vehicle in a completestandstill on a grade, HSA will beautomatically activated. During thetransition period between when thedriver releases the brake pedal andstarts to accelerate to drive off on agrade, HSA holds the brakingpressure for a maximum oftwo seconds to ensure that there isno rolling. The brakes willautomatically release when theaccelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. It will notactivate if the vehicle is in a drivegear and facing downhill, or if thevehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse).



Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel slipand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of the

vehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9-14 and “Turning theSystems Off and On” later in thissection.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:. Flash when TCS is limiting

wheel spin.. Flash when StabiliTrak is

activated.. Turn on and stay on when either

system is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.



If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.

Turning the Systems Offand On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrakis on the center console.

{ Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease the g button. The traction

off light i displays in the instrumentcluster and the appropriate DICmessage displays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5-29.

To turn TCS on again, press andrelease the g button. The traction

off light i displayed in theinstrument cluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe g button is pressed, the systemwill not turn off until the wheels stopspinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the g button until

the traction off light i and

StabiliTrak OFF light g come onand stay on in the instrumentcluster. The appropriate DICmessage displays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5-29.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release the gbutton. The traction off light i and

StabiliTrak OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turn off.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-2.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol is disengaged.

If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak®

system and begins to limit wheelspin while using cruise control, thecruise control automaticallydisengages. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-33. If a collision alert occurswhen cruise control is activated,cruise control is disengaged. SeeForward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-37. When roadconditions allow you to safely use itagain, the cruise control can beturned back on.

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not use thecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads. ON/OFF5 CRUISE: Press to turn

the cruise control system on and off.

* CANCEL: Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move thethumbwheel up briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previously setspeed or hold upward to accelerate.If cruise control is already active,use to increase vehicle speed.



SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease speed.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise button turned off when cruisecontrol is not being used.

1. Press ON/OFF 5 CRUISE.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel towardSET/− and release it. Thedesired set speed brieflyappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. The vehicle returns to thepreviously set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, and thenrelease it.

. To increase the speed in smallincrements, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly and then release it. Eachtime this is done, the vehiclegoes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in smallincrements, move thethumbwheel toward SET/−briefly. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.



Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the previouslyset cruise control speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflymoving the thumbwheel towardSET/− will result in cruise control setto the current vehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle speed. When the brakes areapplied, the cruise control isdisengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control;

step lightly on the brake pedal,the indicator light will go off.

. Press* CANCEL.

. To turn off the cruise control,press ON/OFF5 CRUISE.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if ON/OFF5CRUISE is pressed or if the vehicleis turned off.

Driver AssistanceSystems

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemFor vehicles with this feature, readthe following section before using it.

The Forward Collision Alert (FCA)system may help to avoid or reducethe harm caused by front-endcrashes. FCA provides a flashingred visual alert and beeps whenapproaching a vehicle directlyahead too quickly. FCA alsoprovides a visual alert if followinganother vehicle much too closely.The FCA symbol is on top of theinstrument panel to the right of thesteering wheel.

The forward-looking FCA camerasensor is on the windshield aheadof the rearview mirror. FCA detectsvehicles within a distance ofapproximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 40 km/h(25 mph).



{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. FCA does not warnof pedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving on page 9-3.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

The green vehicle ahead indicatorwill appear when a vehicle isdetected ahead. Whenever thisindicator does not appear, FCA willnot provide alerts to the driver. Theindicator may disappear on curves,highway exit ramps, or hills, or dueto poor visibility. The FCA systemwill not detect another vehicleahead until it is completely in thedriving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

proper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother vehicle too rapidly, the redFCA display will flash and soundseveral high-pitched beeps from thefront. When this occurs, the brakesystem prepares for driver brakingto occur more rapidly. Continue toapply the brake pedal as the drivingsituation dictates.



Tailgating Alert

The red FCA display will staycontinuously illuminated whenfollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press COLLISIONALERT to set the alert timing to far,medium, near or off. The first buttonpress shows the current controlsetting on the DIC. Additional buttonpresses will change this setting. Thechosen setting will remain until it is

changed and will affect both theCollision Alert and the TailgatingAlert features. The timing of bothalerts will vary based on vehiclespeed. The faster the vehicle speed,the further away the alert will occur.Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alerttiming. The range of selectable alerttiming may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may sometimes setunnecessary alerts to turningvehicles, vehicles in other lanes,objects that are not vehicles,or shadows. These alerts arenormal operation and the vehicledoes not need service.

Other Messages

There are messages that mayappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) in the instrumentcluster to provide information aboutFCA. See Object Detection SystemMessages on page 5-28.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, clean the outsideof the windshield area in front of thecamera sensor before consideringtaking the vehicle in for service.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it assists the driver with parking andavoiding objects while inR (Reverse). URPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),and the sensors on the rear bumperdetect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle, and at least20 cm (8 in) off the ground. Thedistance objects can be detectedmay be less during warmer or humidweather.



{ Warning

The URPA system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectsbelow the bumper or that are tooclose or too far from the vehicle.It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with URPA, alwayscheck the area around the vehicleand check all mirrors beforebacking.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single beep soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

A detected obstacle is indicated byaudible beeps. The interval betweenthe beeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.

When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeping iscontinuous for five seconds.

Turning the System On and Off

The URPA system can be turned onand off using the infotainmentsystem controls. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-32 formore information.

The On with Tow Bar Attachedsetting allows for the parking assistto work properly with a small itemattached to the trailer hitch.

When the system is off, PARKASSIST OFF displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Themessage disappears after a shortperiod of time.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.

Turn URPA off when towing a trailer.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: Ifthis message occurs, check thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10-72.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

If the above conditions do not exist,take the vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.



PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPAsystem does not activate due to atemporary condition, the messagedisplays on the DIC. This can occurunder the following conditions:. The driver has disabled the

system.. A trailer was attached to the

vehicle, or an object washanging out of the liftgate duringthe last drive cycle. Once theobject is removed, URPA willreturn to normal operation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera (RVC) system. Read thisentire section before using it.

The RVC can assist the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

{ Warning

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectlocated outside the camera's fieldof view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Perceiveddistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not back thevehicle using only the RVCscreen, during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers,or where there could be crosstraffic. Failure to use proper carebefore backing may result in

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

injury, death, or vehicle damage.Always check behind and aroundthe vehicle before backing.

An image appears on theinfotainment screen when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The infotainment screen goes to theprevious screen after approximately10 seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

To see the previous screen sooner,do one of the following:. Press a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shift into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).



Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).


3. Select Display.

4. Select Rear Camera Options.

5. Select Camera. When a checkmark appears next to theCamera option, then the RVCsystem is on.

Symbols and Guidelines

The RVC system may have afeature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the infotainment screenwhile using the RVC. The UltrasonicRear Park Assist (URPA) systemmust not be disabled to use thecaution symbols. The error messageRear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable may display if URPAhas been disabled and the symbols

have been turned on. SeeUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9-39.

The symbols appear and may coveran object when viewing theinfotainment screen when an objectis detected by the URPA system.

The RVC system may also have aguideline overlay that can help thedriver align the vehicle whenbacking into a parking spot.

To turn the symbols or guidelines onor off:

1. Shift into P (Park).


3. Select Display.

4. Select Rear Camera Options.

5. Select Symbols or Guidelines.The feature is on when a checkmark appears next to it.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERASYSTEM: This message candisplay on the infotainment screenwhen the system is not workingproperly.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.



The area displayed by the camera islimited.

It does not display objects that areclose to either corner or under thebumper and can vary depending onvehicle orientation or roadconditions. Displayed images maybe farther or closer than theyappear.

The following illustrations show thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

1. View displayed by the camera.

1. View displayed by the camera.

2. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directly intothe camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide awarning if the vehicle is crossing adetected lane marker without usinga turn signal in the lane departuredirection. LDW uses a camerasensor to detect the lane markings.It only operates at speeds of 56km/h (35 mph) or greater.



When the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking, the LDWindicator will flash and three beepswill be sounded from the left or rightside, depending on the lanedeparture direction. LDW will notwarn if the turn signal is on in thedeparture direction, or if a sharpmaneuver is made.

{ Warning

The LDW system is an aid to helpthe vehicle stay in the drivinglane. It does not steer the vehicle.The LDW system may not:

. Provide enough time to avoida crash.

. Detect lane markings underbad weather conditions or ifthe windshield is dirty.

. Detect lane markings and willnot detect road edges.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Warn that the vehicle iscrossing a lane marking if thesystem does not detect thelane marking.

If LDW only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road,it will only warn you whendeparting the lane on the sidewhere it has detected a lanemarker. Even with LDW, alwayskeep your attention on the roadand maintain proper vehicleposition within the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield clean and do not useLDW in bad weather conditions.

How the System Works

The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LDW on and off, press theLANE DEPART button on thesteering wheel. The control indicatorwill light when LDW is on.

When the vehicle is started, theLDW indicator on the instrumentpanel will come on briefly.



If LDW is on, the LDW indicator willappear green if the system detectsa left or right lane marking while thevehicle is traveling at 56 km(35 mph) or greater. If the vehiclecrosses a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal in thelane departure direction, thisindicator will change to amber andflash. In addition, three beeps willbe sounded from the left or rightside, depending on the lanedeparture direction.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

If the LDW symbol does not appearwhen the system is on and thevehicle is traveling at least 56 km/h(35 mph):. The lane markings on the road

may not be seen.. The camera sensor may be

blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.. The windshield may be

damaged.

. The weather may be limitingvisibility.

This is normal operation; the vehicledoes not need service. Clean thewindshield.

Lane markings may not be detectedon curves, highway exit ramps,or hills; or due to poor visibility.

If the LDW camera system does notseem to operate properly, cleaningthe outside of the windshield in frontof the camera sensor may correctthe issue.

{ Warning

LDW does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects the lane markings. LDWmay not detect the lane markingsif the camera sensor is blockedby dirt, snow, or ice, or if thewindshield is damaged. It mayalso not detect a lane on windingor hilly roads, or in conditions that

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

can limit visibility such as fog,rain, or snow, or if the headlampsor windshield are not cleaned orin proper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair.

LDW warnings may occur due to tarmarks, shadows, cracks in the road,or other road imperfections. This isnormal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S., to help keep theengine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, werecommend using TOP TIERDetergent Gasolines. Seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasolines.

If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap,E85 or FlexFuel can be used in thevehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel onpage 9-48.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noisemay be heard. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline with a higher octane rating,the engine needs service.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. Driving orstarting could be affected if theincorrect fuel is used. Drive thevehicle with the engine running untilthe fuel is a half tank or less, thenrefuel with the current seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviously described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 and other fuelscontaining more than 15% ethanolmust be used only in FlexFuelvehicles.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive called



methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines with MMT as they canreduce spark plug life and affectemission control systemperformance. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, see your dealer for service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See “ProhibitedFuels" in Recommended Fuel onpage 9-46.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. See

the underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-13. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, or any other fuel not

recommended. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel onpage 9-46.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, partnumber 88861013, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp. Fuel System Treatment PLUSis the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.

Do not use additives with E85 orFlexFuel.



E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline or fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).All other vehicles should use onlythe unleaded gasoline as describedin Recommended Fuel onpage 9-46.

The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

To help locate fuel stations thatcarry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.Department of Energy has analternative fuel website. Seewww.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations.

E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798 or CAN/CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not usethe fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%. Fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

The starting characteristics of E85or FlexFuel make it unsuitable foruse when temperatures fall below−18°C (0°F). Use gasoline or addgasoline to the E85 or FlexFuel.

Because E85 or FlexFuel has lessenergy per liter (gallon) thangasoline, the vehicle will need to berefilled more often. See Filling theTank on page 9-48.

{ Caution

Some additives are notcompatible with E85 or FlexFueland can harm the vehicle's fuelsystem. Do not add anything toE85 or FlexFuel. Damage causedby additives would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way

The tethered fuel cap is behind thefuel door on the vehicle's passengerside. To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in andrelease. When applied pressure isremoved, the fuel door will springpartially open.

Turn the fuel cap counterclockwiseto remove. Do not release the captoo soon or it will spring back.Reinstall the cap by turning itclockwise until it clicks.

If the cap is not properly installed,the malfunction indicator lamp willcome on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-13 for moreinformation.

Do not top off or overfill the tank.Wait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10-72.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.



{ Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap might not fit properly,might cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-13.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, andkeep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.



Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-68.For towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle such as a motorhome, see Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10-69.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:. Become familiar with the state

and local laws that applyspecifically to trailer towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500miles), toprevent damage to the engine,axle or other parts.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 miles) trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.

. Do not use the Fuel EconomyMode when towing.

. Turn off Park Assist whentowing.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.


. Also adjust the ClimateControl system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-26.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.



Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move your hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

{ Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.



Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10-18.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine.. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.



3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See theMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10-18.

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weight ofthe Trailer Tongue” later in thissection.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.



Vehicle

Maximum TrailerWeight with Trailer

Brakes†

GCWR*

2.4L L4 Engine, FWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 625 kg (5,787 lbs)

2.4L L4 Engine, AWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 700 kg (5,952 lbs)

3.6L V6 Engine, FWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 600 kg (7,937 lbs)

3.6L V6 Engine, AWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 700 kg (8,157 lbs)

† For trailers without trailer brakes the maximum trailer weight is 454 kg(1,000 lbs). See Towing Equipment on page 9-56.

*The Gross Combination WeightRating (GCWR) is the totalallowable weight of the completelyloaded vehicle and trailer includingany passengers, cargo, equipmentand conversions. The GCWR for thevehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total gross

weight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-14.

If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (1) shouldweigh 10 to 15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (2).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR



(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicle doesnot exceed any of its ratings —GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, MaximumTrailer Rating or Tongue Weight.The only way to be sure it is notexceeding any of these ratings is toweigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Inflate the vehicle's tires to theupper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on theCertification label or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-14 for moreinformation. Do not go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, or theGAWR, including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, do not go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealer forassistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If so,seal the holes when the hitch isremoved. If the holes are notsealed, dirt, water, and deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from theexhaust can get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust onpage 9-26.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue of

the trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)The vehicle has a TSC feature aspart of the StabiliTrak system.If TSC detects that the trailer isswaying, the vehicle's brakes areautomatically applied.



When TSC is applying the brakes,the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator lightflashes to notify the driver to reducespeed. If the trailer continues tosway, StabiliTrak will reduce enginetorque to help slow the vehicle.

TSC will not function if StabiliTrak isturned off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-33.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-29 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-30.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-2

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-18Power Steering Fluid (2.4LL4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Power Steering Fluid (3.6LV6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-24Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-29

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-30Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Electrical SystemFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-39Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50


10-2 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-64

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-68Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and


Vehicle Care 10-3

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-30.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-29.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11-14.

{ Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.


10-4 Vehicle Care

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the release handle locatedbelow the instrument panel tothe left of the steering wheel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle tofind the secondary hood releasehandle. The handle is under thefront edge of the hood near thecenter. Push the handle to theright and at the same time raisethe hood.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)above the vehicle and release itso it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Engine Compartment Overview

2.4L L4 Engine


10-6 Vehicle Care

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-12.

2. Engine Cover on page 10-8.

3. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10-8.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10-8.

5. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrakes on page 10-21.

6. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-31.

7. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-65.

8. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-65.

9. Battery on page 10-23 (Outof View).

10. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10-15.

11. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10-20.


Vehicle Care 10-7

3.6L V6 Engine


10-8 Vehicle Care

1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-12.

2. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir(Under Engine Cover). SeePower Steering Fluid (2.4L L4Engine) on page 10-20 or PowerSteering Fluid (3.6L V6 Engine)on page 10-20.

3. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10-8.

4. Engine Cover on page 10-8.

5. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10-8.

6. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrakes on page 10-21.

7. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-31.

8. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-65.

9. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10-65.

10. Battery on page 10-23 (Outof View).

11. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10-15.

12. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10-20.

Engine Cover

Engine Cover 3.6L V6

1. Oil Fill Cap

2. Engine Cover Bolt

3. Engine Cover

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (1).

2. Remove the engine coverbolt (2).

3. Raise the engine cover (3) torelease from the retainers.

4. Lift and remove the enginecover.

5. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstallengine cover.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.


Vehicle Care 10-9

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-11.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

2.4L L4 Engine

3.6L V6 Engine

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2.


10-10 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

{ Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be used.An oil of this viscosity grade willprovide easier cold starting for theengine at extremely lowtemperatures. When selecting an oilof the appropriate viscosity grade,always select an oil of the correct


Vehicle Care 10-11

specification. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or rags

containing used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5-27.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.


10-12 Vehicle Care

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENU button todisplay the VehicleInformation menu.

3. Press either the up or downarrows to view REMAININGOIL LIFE.

4. Press the SET/CLR button until100% is displayed.

5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

Or:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at your dealer. Contact yourdealer for additional information or

the procedure can be found in theservice manual. To purchase aservice manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3, and be sureto use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter at the scheduled maintenanceintervals. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3 for moreinformation. If driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.


Vehicle Care 10-13

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10-4.

2. Locate the air filter housing onthe passenger side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.

3. Remove the four air cleanerhousing cover screws.

4. Pull straight up on the cover, andwhile holding the cover, removethe air cleaner filter.

5. Inspect or replace the air cleanerfilter.

How to Reinstall Engine AirCleaner/Filter

1. Install the air cleaner filter intothe air cleaner housing. Theouter air cleaner filter seal mustbe fitted properly in the aircleaner housing.

2. Align the air cleaner housingcover tabs to the air cleanerhousing.

3. Install the air cleaner housingcover using the four screws.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

{ Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.


10-14 Vehicle Care

Cooling System

2.4L L4 Engine

1. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

3.6L V6 Engine

1. Engine Cooling Fans (Outof View)

2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolantsurge tank is boiling, do not doanything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on alevel surface.

The coolant level should be at theCOLD FILL line. If it is not, thevehicle may have a leak at theradiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhereelse in the cooling system.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-15

If there seems to be no leak, withthe engine on, check to see if theelectric engine cooling fan isrunning. If the engine isoverheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, the vehicleneeds service. Turn off the engine.

{ Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed to

remain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10-18.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or others

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.


10-16 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in themixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the COLD FILL line, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before this isdone. See Cooling System onpage 10-14 for more information.

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on the driverside of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet,check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not atthe COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it. See EngineOverheating on page 10-18 for moreinformation.


Vehicle Care 10-17

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

{ Caution

In cold weather, water can freezeand crack the engine, radiator,heater core, and other parts. Usethe recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.


10-18 Vehicle Care

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. Thiswill allow any pressure still left tobe vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture, to the COLD FILL line.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan(s).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the COLDFILL line.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Besure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

{ Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeat Steps1–3 and reinstall the pressure cap.If the coolant still is not at the properlevel when the system cools downagain, see your dealer.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating. There is anengine coolant temperature warninglight on the vehicle's instrumentpanel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5-10.

The decision may be made not to liftthe hood when this warningappears, but instead get servicehelp right away. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.

If the decision to lift the hood ismade, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan(s) are running. If theengine is overheating, the fan(s)should be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.

. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling systemchecked for proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.


10-20 Vehicle Care

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.

Power Steering Fluid(2.4L L4 Engine)The vehicle has electric powersteering and does not use powersteering fluid.

Power Steering Fluid(3.6L V6 Engine)

The power steering fluid reservoir islocated toward the rear of theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-5 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

The power steering fluid does notneed to be checked unless there isa leak in the system or you hear anunusual noise. Have the systeminspected and repaired if there is afluid loss.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the engine off and let itcool down.

2. Remove the engine cover. Referto Engine Cover on page 10-8.

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

4. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be betweenMAX and MIN line at roomtemperature. If the fluid is on orbelow MIN line, add fluid.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, refer to Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11-11.Always use the proper fluid.

{ Caution

Use of the incorrect fluid maydamage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions before


Vehicle Care 10-21

use. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5 for reservoir location.

{ Caution

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be

heard all the time when the vehicleis moving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well together

if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. See

Engine Compartment Overview onpage 10-5 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.


Vehicle Care 10-23

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-16.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ Warning

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

{ Caution

. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system partsso badly that they will have tobe replaced. Do not letsomeone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ Warning

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10-65 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

Under normal driving conditions,transfer case fluid does not requirechanging or checking unless there

is a fluid leak or unusual noise.If required, have the transfer caseserviced by your dealer.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).

If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.


Vehicle Care 10-25

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckIf equipped with a key type ignition,while parked and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-12.


10-26 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not allow thewiper arm to touch the windshield.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the front wiper blades:

1. Lift the wiper arm from thewindshield until no furthermovement is possible.

2. Press the square button on thetop side, at the end of the wiperarm, and pull the wiper blade outof the end of the wiper arm.

3. Install the wiper blade connectorby sliding into the end of thewiper arm until the square buttonon the wiper blade clicks intoplace with the wiper arm.

4. Place the wiper arm with thewiper blade in place back on thewindshield.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

The rear wiper blade and wiper armhave a cover for protection. Thecover must be removed before thewiper blade can be replaced.

To remove the cover:

1. Slide a plastic tool under thecover and push upward tounsnap.

2. Slide the cover toward the wiperblade tip to unhook it from theblade assembly.

3. Remove the cover.

4. After wiper blade replacement,ensure that cover hook slidesinto the slot in the bladeassembly.

5. Snap the cover down to secure.


Vehicle Care 10-27

To replace the wiper blade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Push the release lever (2) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (1) out of theblade assembly (3).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Replace the wiper cover.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10-31.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps

1. Low Beam Headlamp

2. High Beam headlamp

3. Park/Turn Signal Lamp

4. Sidemarker Lamp

To replace:

1. Turn the tire to reach the accessport cap on front of the wheelwell cover.

2. Remove screw (1) and turn theaccess port cap (2)counterclockwise to remove.

3. If replacing the low/highheadlamp bulb, remove the dustcover cap from the back of theheadlamp housing by turning thecap counterclockwise.

4. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly.

5. Remove the bulb from thesocket or disconnect the bulbassembly from the harnessconnector.

6. Install a new bulb.

7. Reinstall the lamp socket intothe lamp assembly by turning itclockwise.

8. Replace the dust cover cap onthe lamp assembly.

9. Reinstall the wheel well coveraccess port cap and secure byinstalling the screw.

Fog LampsTo replace one of these bulbs:


Vehicle Care 10-29

1. Locate the fog lamp assemblyunder the front fascia.

2. Remove the bulb from the lampassembly by turning itcounterclockwise and pullingstraight out.

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector.

4. Reverse Steps 2 and 3 forassembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps

1. Sidemarker

2. Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp/Taillamp

3. Back-up Lamp

To replace one of these lamps:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2-9.

2. Remove the two screw coversfrom the taillamp assembly.

3. Remove the two screwssecuring the taillamp assembly.

4. Pull the taillamp assembly out ofthe vehicle body.

5. Disconnect the lamp wiringharness.


10-30 Vehicle Care

6. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull it out.

7. Pull the bulb straight out of thesocket.

8. Install the new bulb.

9. Push the bulb socket in and turnit clockwise.

10. Reverse steps 2–5 to reinstallthe lamp assembly.

License Plate Lamp

Lamp Assembly

Bulb Assembly

1. Bulb Socket

2. Bulb

3. Lamp Assembly

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate partway. SeeLiftgate on page 2-9.

2. Push the left end of the lampassembly toward the right.

3. Pull the lamp assembly down toremove it from the liftgate.

4. Turn the bulb socket (1)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (3).

5. Pull the bulb (2) straight out ofthe bulb socket (1).

6. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

7. Push the lamp assembly into theliftgate engaging the clip sidefirst.


Vehicle Care 10-31

8. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 921

Fog Lamp Front H11 LL

HeadlampHigh Beam

9005LL

HeadlampLow Beam

H11 LL

License Plate Lamp W5WLL

Parking Lamp/TurnSignal Front

7444NA

Sidemarker Frontand Rear

194

Taillamp/Turn SignalLamp/Stop Lamp

3157K RD

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureto replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

There are two fuse blocks in thevehicle: one in the enginecompartment and one in theinstrument panel.

There is a fuse puller located in theengine compartment fuse block.See Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-31. It can be usedto easily remove fuses from the fuseblock.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,squeeze the clips on the cover andlift it straight up. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.


10-32 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

J-CaseFuses

Usage

1 Cool Fan 1

2 Cool Fan 2

3 Brake Booster

J-CaseFuses

Usage

4 Power Windows –Right

5 Memory SeatModule

6 Power Seat – Left


Vehicle Care 10-33

J-CaseFuses

Usage

7 Instrument PanelFuse Block 1

8 Rear Defogger

9 Starter

10 AIR Pump Motor


12 Sunroof

13 Antilock BrakeSystem Pump


15 Power Windows– Left

16 Antilock BrakeSystem Module

77 Power Seat – Right

Mini Fuses Usage

17 TransmissionControl ModuleBattery

18 Trailer Parking Light

19 AIR Pump Solenoid

20 Engine ControlModule Battery

21 Canister Vent

22 Trailer Left Side (IfEquipped)

23 Lift Gate Module

24 Power Lumbar

25 Trailer Right Side (IfEquipped)

26 Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

27 Memory MirrorModule

28 Regulated VoltageControl BatterySensor

Mini Fuses Usage

29 Front Wiper

30 Rear Wiper

31 Air ConditioningCompressor

32 Rear Latch

33 Heated Mirrors

34 Horn

35 Right High-BeamHeadlamp

36 Left High-BeamHeadlamp

37 Ignition Even Coil

38 Ignition Odd Coil

39 Windshield Washer

40 Front Fog Lamps

41 Post CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor

42 Engine ControlModule


10-34 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

43 Pre–CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor

44 TransmissionControl Module

45 Mirror

46 Fuel System ControlModule Ignition

47 Spare

48 Rear Drive Module

49 Lift Gate ModuleLogic

50 Instrument PanelFuse Block Ignition

51 Heated Seat– Front

52 Fuel System ControlModule

Mini Fuses Usage

53 Engine ControlModule

54 Rear Vision Camera

78 Passenger PowerLumber

Midi Fuse Usage

55 Electric PowerSteering

MicroRelays

Usage

56 AIR Pump Solenoid

57 Brake Booster

58 Cooling Fan Low

59 HeadlampHigh Beam

60 Cooling Fan Control

61 Wiper On/OffControl

MicroRelays

Usage

62 Air ConditioningCompressor

63 Rear Defogger

64 Wiper Speed

65 Fog Lamp

66 Engine Control

67 Starter

68 Run/Crank

Mini Relays Usage

69 Cooling Fan High

70 AIR Pump Motor


Vehicle Care 10-35

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block islocated on the passenger side panelof the center console. To access thefuses, open the fuse panel doorfrom the passenger side by pullingit out.

To reinstall the door, insert the tabson the top of the door into theconsole first, then push the doorback into its original location.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block


10-36 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

1 Steering WheelDimming

2 Spare

3 Spare

4 Body ControlModule 1

5 Infotainment


7 Noise ControlModule


9 Radio

10 Spare

11 Ultrasonic RearParking AssistModule

12 Heater, Ventilationand Air ConditioningBattery

Mini Fuses Usage

13 Auxiliary PowerFront

14 Heater, Ventilationand Air ConditioningIgnition

15 Display


17 AuxiliaryPower Rear

18 Instrument PanelIgnition

19 Universal GarageDoor Opener


21 Spare

22 Sensing andDiagnostic ModuleIgnition

23 Front Camera

Mini Fuses Usage

24 Spare

25 Transmission GearShift PositionIndicator

26 Spare

27 Spare

28 Spare


31 Amplifier

32 Discrete LogicIgnition Switch

33 CommunicationsIntegration Module


35 Sensing andDiagnostic ModuleBattery

36 Data LinkConnection


Vehicle Care 10-37

Mini Fuses Usage

37 Instrument PanelBattery

38 Passenger SensingSystem Module

39 Spare

J-CaseFuses

Usage

29 Front Blower Motor


Relays Usage

41 Logistic Relay (IfEquipped)

42 Retained AccessoryPower Relay

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-14.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)


10-38 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10-38.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on snow or ice-coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10-52.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.


Vehicle Care 10-39

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a special tread andcompound that are optimized formaximum dry and wet roadperformance. This special tread andcompound will decreaseperformance in cold climates, andon ice and snow. We recommendinstalling winter tires on the vehicleif frequent driving in coldtemperatures or on snow or icecovered roads is expected. SeeWinter Tires on page 10-38.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first two


10-40 Vehicle Care

digits represent the week(01–52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on three

performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10-54.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and goneflat. If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, see Compact SpareTire on page 10-64 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 10-57.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.


Vehicle Care 10-41

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(5) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10-44.

(6) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passenger

vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem 3 of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.


10-42 Vehicle Care

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are

automatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)

before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10-44.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-14.


Vehicle Care 10-43

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-14.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-14.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-14.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10-44 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-14.


10-44 Vehicle Care

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the tread

of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10-51.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10-54.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-14.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-14.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.


Vehicle Care 10-45

{ Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-14.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare tirepressure should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). See Compact SpareTire on page 10-64.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or

tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.


Vehicle Care 10-47

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-47.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-14.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and details

about the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-22.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-14, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10-44.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10-50, Tire Rotation onpage 10-50 and Tires onpage 10-37.


10-48 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warning

message also displays. The low tirepressure warning light and DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the problem iscorrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The DICmessage and the TPMSmalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10-52.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.


Vehicle Care 10-49

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thetires or replacing one or more of theTPMS sensors. The TPMS sensormatching process should also beperformed after replacing a sparetire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightand the DIC message should go offat the next ignition cycle. Thesensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, using a TPMSrelearn tool, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire,and driver side rear. See yourdealer for service or to purchase arelearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.


3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information Menu inthe Driver Information Center(DIC). Use the arrow keys toscroll to the Tire Pressurescreen.

4. Press the SET/CLR button tobegin the sensor matchingprocess.

A message requestingacceptance of the processshould display.

5. Press the SET/CLR button againto confirm the selection.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.


10-50 Vehicle Care


12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheel

alignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10-51and Wheel Replacement onpage 10-56.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label after


Vehicle Care 10-51

the tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-44and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-14.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10-47.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12-2.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

an emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10-50 and TireRotation on page 10-50.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare if


10-52 Vehicle Care

equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacturer date is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01–52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle for

at least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Spec

number is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-39.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation on page 10-50.However, if it is necessary toreplace only one axle set ofworn tires, place the new tireson the rear axle.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H,V, W, Y and ZR speed ratedtires. Never exceed the wintertires’ maximum speed capabilitywhen using winter tires with alower speed rating.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, make

sure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10-46.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-14.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover


10-54 Vehicle Care

may be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10-52 and Accessories andModifications on page 10-2.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tire


Vehicle Care 10-55

graded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other road


10-56 Vehicle Care

surface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

{ Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicle

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

ground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.


Vehicle Care 10-57

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

A Type S low-profile cable can beused only if the cablemanufacturer recommends it foruse on the vehicle, the tire sizecombination, and road conditions.Follow the manufacturer'sinstructions. To help avoiddamage to the vehicle, driveslowly, readjust or remove thecable if it is contacting the vehicleand do not spin the vehicle's tires.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Install the cables on the front tiresonly. Cables should not beinstalled on the spare tire or onthe optional 19-inch tire.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10-37. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.


10-58 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-3.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1).

1. Wheel Block

2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

1. Extension

2. Wheel Wrench

3. Jack

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2-9.

2. Lift the load floor up.

3. Remove the extension (1), wheelwrench (2) and jack (3).

Place the tools next to the tirebeing changed.

4. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise and removethe spare tire.

Place either end of the extensioninto a retainer hole to loosen theretainer nut if unable to by hand.

5. Place the spare tire next to thetire being changed.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10-57 for moreinformation.

2. For vehicles with a wheel coveror center cap, pull the cover orcenter cap away from the wheelto remove it. Store the wheelcover in the cargo area until youhave the flat tire repaired orreplaced.


10-60 Vehicle Care

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.

{ Caution

Make sure that the jack lift headis in the correct position or youmay damage your vehicle. Therepairs would not be covered byyour warranty.

4. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.The location is indicated by amark on the bottom edge of thefront and rear door plasticmolding. The jack must not beused in any other position.

5. Place the jack notch under theframe rail seam.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.


Vehicle Care 10-61

6. Place the jack under the vehicle.

7. Attach the jack handle extensionto the jack by sliding the hookthrough the end of the jack andinsert the other end of the jackhandle into the wrench.

8. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the road tire to clear theground.

9. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

10. Remove the flat tire.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

an emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

11. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

12. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.


10-62 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

13. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

14. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

aftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

{ Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the propersequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications forthe wheel nut torque specification.

15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

16. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

When reinstalling the wheel cover orcenter cap on the full-size tire,tighten all five plastic caps handsnug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them with thewheel wrench an additionalone-quarter of a turn.


Vehicle Care 10-63

{ Caution

Wheel covers will not fit on thevehicle's compact spare. If you tryto put a wheel cover on thecompact spare, the cover or thespare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

1. Cable

2. Liftgate Hinges

3. Center of the Wheel

4. Door Striker

To store the flat tire:

1. Remove the cable package. Thecable is stored in a plastic bagunder the compact spare tire.

2. Remove the small center cap bytapping the back of the cap withthe extension of the shaft, if thevehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Put the flat tire in the rearstorage area with the valve stempointing toward the rear of thevehicle.


10-64 Vehicle Care

4. Pull the cable (1) through thedoor striker (4) then the center ofthe wheel (3).

5. Hook the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinges (2).

6. Hook the other end of the cableonto the outside portion of theliftgate hinge on the other side ofthe vehicle.

7. Pull on the cable to make sure itis secure.

8. Make sure the metal tube iscentered at the striker. Push thetube toward the front of thevehicle.

9. Close the liftgate and make sureit is latched properly.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Compact Spare Tire

{ Warning

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be 420 kPa(60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after being installed on thevehicle. The compact spare tire isdesigned for temporary use only.


Vehicle Care 10-65

The vehicle will perform differentlywith the spare tire installed and it isrecommended that the vehiclespeed be limited to 80 km/h(50 mph). To conserve the tread ofthe spare tire, have the standard tirerepaired or replaced as soon asconvenient and return the spare tireto the storage area.

When using a compact spare tire,the ABS and Traction Controlsystems may engage until the sparetire is recognized by the vehicle,especially on slippery roads. Adjustdriving to reduce possiblewheel slip.

{ Caution

When the compact spare isinstalled, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the railswhich can damage the tire, wheel,and other parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

{ Caution

Tire chains will not fit the compactspare. Using them can damagethe vehicle and the chains. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10-23.

Jump starting can be used onvehicles with run-down batteries byusing jumper cables and anothervehicle.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


10-66 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely. Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage to thevehicle that would not be coveredby the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will not work,and it could damage the vehicle.

{ Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

{ Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.


Vehicle Care 10-67

1. Remote Positive (+) Terminal

2. Remote Negative (−) Terminal

1. The vehicle used to jump startmust have 12-volt battery with anegative ground.

{ Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. The vehicles should be closeenough for the jumper cables toreach, but the vehicles shouldnot be touching. Touching couldcause grounding and possibleelectrical system damage.

Put both vehicles in P (Park) andset the parking brake firmly.

3. Unplug accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or theaccessory power outlet. Turn off

the radio and all lamps that arenot needed. Turn off the ignitionon both vehicles.

4. Locate the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminals on bothvehicles. Some vehicles haveremote jump starting terminals.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

5. The remote positive (+)terminal (1) is located on theunderhood fuse block, on thedriver side. Lift the red cap touncover the terminal.

The remote negative (−)terminal (2) is a stud behind themetal tab stamped with GND (−)near the driver side strut tower.

6. The jumper cables should be ingood working condition with noloose or missing insulation. Thevehicles could be damaged ifthey are not.

7. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

8. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

9. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalof the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable away fromthe dead battery, but not nearengine parts that move.

11. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine.

12. Press the unlock symbol on theremote keyless entrytransmitter to disarm thesecurity system, if equipped.

13. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it needsservice.

{ Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

Towing the Vehicle

{ Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not lashor hook to the chassiscomponents — including the frontand rear subframes, suspensioncontrol arms, and links — duringtowing and recovery of a disabledvehicle, or when securing thevehicle to a flatbed car carrier.Use the proper nylon strapharnesses around the tires tosecure them to the flatbed carcarrier.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier. A wheel lift tow truckcould damage the vehicle.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.


Vehicle Care 10-69

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. The towing capacity of the

towing vehicle. Be sure to readthe tow vehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. How far the vehicle will betowed. Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. The proper towing equipment.See your dealer or traileringprofessional for additional adviceand equipmentrecommendations.

. If the vehicle is ready to betowed. Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

Front-wheel-drive andall-wheel-drive vehicles may bedinghy towed from the front. Thesevehicles can also be towed byplacing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of theground. For other towing options,see “Dolly Towing” following in thissection.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle to be towedand secure it to the towingvehicle.

2. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).


10-70 Vehicle Care

4. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

5. Turn all accessories off.

6. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove fuse 32,the Discrete Logic IgnitionSwitch fuse, from the instrumentpanel fuse block and store it in asafe location. See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block onpage 10-35.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is towed withoutperforming each of the stepslisted under “Dinghy Towing,” theautomatic transmission could bedamaged. Be sure to follow allsteps of the dinghy towingprocedure prior to and aftertowing the vehicle.

{ Caution

If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceededwhile towing the vehicle, it couldbe damaged. Never exceed105 km/h (65 mph) while towingthe vehicle.

Once the destination is reached:


2. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Install fuse 32, the DiscreteLogic Ignition Switch fuse. SeeInstrument Panel Fuse Block onpage 10-35.

5. Start the engine and let it idle formore than three minutes beforedriving the vehicle.

{ Caution

Do not tow a vehicle with the frontdrive wheels on the ground if oneof the front tires is a compactspare tire. Towing with twodifferent tire sizes on the front ofthe vehicle can cause severedamage to the transmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-DriveVehicles)

All-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).


4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

5. Follow the dolly manufacturer'sinstructions for preparing thevehicle and dolly for towing.

6. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

{ Caution

Towing the vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never have thevehicle towed from the rear.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

{ Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaning

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

products can be obtained fromyour dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

{ Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

Thee symbol is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be power

washed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow the car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that maybe damaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such as


Vehicle Care 10-73

calcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

{ Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

may damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

{ Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum. To preventdamage always follow thesecleaning instructions:. Be sure the molding is cool to

the touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use a cleaning solutionapproved for aluminum. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use chrome cleaners.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses andemblems. Follow instructions under"Washing the Vehicle" previously inthis section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating.

Use only lukewarm water, a softcloth, and mild car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses. Donot clean or wipe them while theyare dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:. Abrasive or caustic agents.. Washer fluids and other cleaning

agents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.

{ Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshieldwhen washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks fromrubber material on painted surfacescan be removed by rubbing with aclean cloth. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11-11.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

{ Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

{ Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

{ Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect the front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. If equipped, inspectthe hydraulic power steering forproper hook-up, binding, leaks,


10-76 Vehicle Care

cracks, chafing, etc. Visually checkconstant velocity joints, rubberboots, and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thefuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, Spring andFall, use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion

material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.


Vehicle Care 10-77

Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

{ Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.


10-78 Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

{ Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

{ Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, spot lifters, or spotremovers. Do not use cleanersthat contain silicone or wax-basedproducts. Cleaners containing

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

these solvents can permanentlychange the appearance and feelof leather or soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

{ Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

Wash with warm water and milddetergent. Do not use chlorinebleach. Rinse with cold water, andthen dry completely.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by two retainers.1. Pull up on the rear of the floor

mat to unlock each retainer andremove.

2. Reinstall by lining up the floormat retainer openings over thecarpet retainers and snap intoposition.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-14

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trained

technicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

{ Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services -Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-14.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9-46.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10-3.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10-8.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-44.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-50.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-20.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-11.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10-50.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10-8 and Engine OilLife System on page 10-11.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10-15.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-20.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10-72. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10-25.



. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10-44.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10-50.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-12.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10-72.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3-17.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10-72.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10-24.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10-24.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10-25.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10-25.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2-19.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Change automatic transmission fluid. Changefilter if serviceable. @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped withAWD. (4) @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7) @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-14.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Change automatic transmission fluid. Changefilter if serviceable. @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped withAWD. (4) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7) @

Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices - Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if the

vehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.



(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-14.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Careon page 10-72.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.



. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-11 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.



. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smooth

vehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10-76 and Exterior Care onpage 10-72.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specification of the proper SAEviscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-8.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10-15.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Hydraulic Power Steering System(V6 engines only)

DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 88900401, in Canada 89021678).

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, inCanada 89021674) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25899727 A3138C

Engine Oil Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

3.6L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 20901295 CF177



Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Spark Plugs

2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108

3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in) 22868413 —

Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in) 22868414 —

Rear – 32.5 cm (12.8 in) 25788783 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.4L L4 Engine 7.8 L 8.2 qt

3.6L V6 Engine 10.2 L 10.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt

3.6L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

2.4L L4 Engine 71.1 L 18.8 gal

3.6L V6 Engine 79.1 L 20.9 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 0.8 L 0.85 qt


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 K Automatic 0.75–0.90 mm (0.030–0.035 in)

3.6L V6 3 Automatic 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L L4 Engine

3.6L V6 Engine


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800–222–1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.chevrolet.com

The Chevrolet online ownerexperience is a one-stop resourcethat allows interaction withChevrolet and keeps importantvehicle-specific information in oneplace.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,required alerts, OnStar onboardvehicle diagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12-1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.chevrolet.com to registeryour vehicle.



Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Take a trip to the Chevrolet OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips, and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find theChevrolet-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.



. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.



Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the Roadside

Assistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem is

safety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.



Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes

one-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.



Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resale

value, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history of

these parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repair



center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3-23.



Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.



Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.



Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder EDR. The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.



OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation; aboutcollisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PressQ or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Press the OnStar Emergencybutton> to get a priorityconnection to an EmergencyAdvisor available 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get assistance in severe

weather or other crisis andevacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

Press> to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if equipped. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if equippedwith automatic door locks, and canhelp police locate the vehicle if it isstolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PressQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.The OnStar mapping database iscontinuously updated. For coveragemaps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with addressand the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations fromMapQuest.com to their Turn-by-TurnNavigation or screen-basednavigation system. When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.

Destination Download: PressQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.

After the call ends, press the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

If directions are downloaded to thenavigation system, the route canonly be canceled through thenavigation system.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled through the OnStarRemoteLink® mobile app. Forcoverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).


14-4 OnStar

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple®,Android™, and BlackBerry® devicesto check vehicle fuel level, oil life,or tire pressure; to start the vehicle(if equipped) or unlock it; or toconnect to an OnStar Advisor. ForOnStar RemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Hands-Free Calling

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to tryagain. System responds: “OK,storing <name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”


OnStar 14-5

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If anOn-Demand Diagnostics check isneeded between e-mails, pressQ,and an Advisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. Call 888-4-ONSTAR

(888-466-7827).. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for features


14-6 OnStar

to function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of the

vehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTY

system can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca(Canada)

The website provides access toaccount information, allowsmanagement of the OnStarsubscription, and viewing of videosof each service. Get subscriptionplan pricing and sign up for OnStarVehicle Diagnostics. Click on the“My Account” tab on the homepage. The website navigation andservices provided may vary bycountry.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. To


OnStar 14-7

change the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five days.After five days, OnStar can contact

Roadside Assistance and alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbal

route or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-8 OnStar

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-57. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada).Privacy-sensitive users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - libcurl and unzipacknowledgments

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software. Beloware the notices and licensesassociated with this software:

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this document


OnStar 14-9

should be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shall

Info-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that is

permitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of thealtered versions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP. Suchaltered versions are furtherprohibited frommisrepresentative use of the


14-10 OnStar

Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its own sourceand binary releases.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-20AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-24, 9-30AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticClimate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-3Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-25Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15BluetoothOverview . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-23, 7-26

BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-16

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-19Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-28, 6-3Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-30Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-29

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-47Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2CameraRear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-25

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-39

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44, 3-47Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76


INDEX i-3

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-64CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3DevicesAuxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-24, 9-30

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-23Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-11If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-14Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


i-4 INDEX

Driving (cont'd)Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-14Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Economy ModeFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29

Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Cooling System Messages . . .5-26Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-27Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

FlexFuelE85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . .10-28, 6-3

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21


INDEX i-5

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-47Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-20Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Requirements, California . . . . .9-47System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-21High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-1Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-21

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15HeaterEngine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Heating and AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1, 8-3


i-6 INDEX

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-11Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-32Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-17Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-28Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-39LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-19Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-1Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-17Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont'd)Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17LocksDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-20Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-26Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Object Detection System . . . . .5-28Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-29Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Messages (cont'd)Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-17Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-19


i-8 INDEX

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-31Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-25

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-26Parking AssistUltrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-25Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-2

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-21, 7-23, 7-26

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-23Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2


INDEX i-9

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-41Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-31Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-18

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-18Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-17

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-17


i-10 INDEX

Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-47

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-14

Service (cont'd)Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-24Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Storage AreasCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15, 7-1Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3


INDEX i-11

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-47Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-46Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Tires (cont'd)Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-56When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-51Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-51Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-69Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-56Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-56Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-39Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-35Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3


i-12 INDEX

Vehicle (cont'd)IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-31Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-43

Warning LightForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-37Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-25WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Documents

2014 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M - Dealer E Process